System 160 Enu

Tekla Structures
System Manual
Product version 16.0 December 2009

2010 Tekla Corporation
2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved. This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of this Software Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certain warranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, defines permitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All information set forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does not guarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to make changes and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise. In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorized reproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law. Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to a third-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third party and disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated. Portions of this software: D-Cubed 2D DCM 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. EPM toolkit 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved. XML parser 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Project Data Control Library 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved. DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rights reserved. FlexNet Copyright 2006 Flexera Software Limited. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary and confidential technology provided by and owned by Flexera Software Limited Of Schaumburg, IL, USA. Any use, copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in any form or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software Limited is strictly prohibited. Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software Limited in writing, possession of this technology shall not be construed to confer any license or rights under any of Flexera Softwares intellectual property rights, whether by estoppel, implication, or otherwise. The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may be the subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patent applications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.
Conventions used in this guide

Typographical conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
Font
Bold
Usage Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This font is used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box and button names, and list items. New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current context for the first time. Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you would normally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font. This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for any text that you should type yourself.
Italic bold Monospace
Noteboxes
The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It can also point you to other information in this guide that you might find useful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like this one. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting your time.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Contents
Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3
Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 15

1.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 15 Firm and project folders ................................................................................................................... Catalogs ........................................................................................................................................... Options............................................................................................................................................. Profile names ............................................................................................................................ Connections .............................................................................................................................. Edge distance ............................................................................................................................ Units and decimals........................................................................................................................... Updating units and decimals in dialog boxes ............................................................................ Recording and running macros ........................................................................................................ Warning messages .......................................................................................................................... 1.2 Automating the detailing process ..................................................................................................... Predefining part properties............................................................................................................... Modeling tools.................................................................................................................................. AutoDefaults..................................................................................................................................... AutoConnection................................................................................................................................ 1.3 Drawing properties ........................................................................................................................... Layouts and templates ..................................................................................................................... Reports and symbols ....................................................................................................................... Selection filters................................................................................................................................. Wizards ............................................................................................................................................ Defining print devices....................................................................................................................... 1.4 Setting Autosave interval ................................................................................................................. Autosave file location ....................................................................................................................... Keeping Autosave files..................................................................................................................... Usernames....................................................................................................................................... Application error ............................................................................................................................... Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read. ................................................................................... 1.5 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 19 19 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 23 24 24 24 25 25
Modeling ............................................................................................................................................... 19
Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 21
Autosave............................................................................................................................................... 22
Customizing the interface ..................................................................................................................... 25

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................... Managing toolbars ..................................................................................................................... Icons .......................................................................................................................................... Creating a user-defined toolbar........................................................................................................ Adding customized icons for macros ......................................................................................... Creating a user-defined menu.......................................................................................................... Defining shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 1.6 Virtual memory ................................................................................................................................. Display adaptor ................................................................................................................................ Solid buffer size................................................................................................................................ How Tekla Structures handles solids ............................................................................................... 1.7
25 26 27 27 27 27 28 29 29 29 30
Optimizing system performance ........................................................................................................... 29
Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API ............................................................................. 30
Multi-user mode....................................................................................... 33
2.1 General information on the multi-user mode ........................................................................................ 33 When to use multi-user mode .......................................................................................................... Switching between single-user and multi-user modes .............................................................. Changing the server of a multi-user model ................................................................................ Overview of the multi-user system ................................................................................................... The Tekla Structures server ..................................................................................................... How multi-user works....................................................................................................................... Locking ...................................................................................................................................... Setting up the multi-user system...................................................................................................... Saving in multi-user mode................................................................................................................ Save .......................................................................................................................................... Autosave ................................................................................................................................... Saving model revision comments .................................................................................................... Shutting down the model.................................................................................................................. Copying multi-user models............................................................................................................... Displaying active multi-users............................................................................................................ Clearing locks................................................................................................................................... Error messages................................................................................................................................ Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 2.2 34 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 38 38 38 38 40 40 40 41 41 42
Modeling in multi-user mode................................................................................................................. 43 Working with a master model........................................................................................................... 43 Numbering setup.............................................................................................................................. 47 Synchronizing numbering with the master model ............................................................................ 48
2.3
Drawings in multi-user mode ................................................................................................................ 49 About drawing files........................................................................................................................... 49 Guidelines for multi-user drawings................................................................................................... 49
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Locks for drawings ........................................................................................................................... 50 2.4 Maintenance procedures....................................................................................................................... 50 Checking multi-user databases ........................................................................................................ 50 Deleting unnecessary drawing files.................................................................................................. 51 2.5 Access rights......................................................................................................................................... 51 Locking objects................................................................................................................................. Controlling access to attributes ........................................................................................................ Restricting access to model ............................................................................................................. Controlling access to numbering setup ............................................................................................ 51 52 53 53
Files and Folders..................................................................................... 55

3.1 Initialization files.................................................................................................................................... 55 Storing advanced options settings ................................................................................................... Setting advanced options .......................................................................................................... Using the Advanced Options dialog box .................................................................................... Editing the user.ini file ................................................................................................................ Disabling advanced options in an initialization file ..................................................................... Structure........................................................................................................................................... Initialization file reading order .................................................................................................... Creating customized initialization files ....................................................................................... Including other initialization files ................................................................................................ Creating shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 3.2 Input files .......................................................................................................................................... Component description files ...................................................................................................... Data files .......................................................................................................................................... Data files and modeling tools ..................................................................................................... DSTV connection properties ............................................................................................................ Messages ......................................................................................................................................... Profiles ............................................................................................................................................. inp (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................. cnv (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................ lis (ASCII) ................................................................................................................................... Binary files ................................................................................................................................. Bin .................................................................................................................................................... Fonts ................................................................................................................................................ Symbols............................................................................................................................................ System ............................................................................................................................................. File extensions ................................................................................................................................. 3.3 56 56 56 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 61 61 62 62 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 67 67
File types and function .......................................................................................................................... 60
Folders .................................................................................................................................................. 70 Folder search order .......................................................................................................................... 70
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Model folder ..................................................................................................................................... Saved attributes ........................................................................................................................ System folder ................................................................................................................................... Project and firm folders .................................................................................................................... Project folder ............................................................................................................................. Firm folder ................................................................................................................................. Template folder ................................................................................................................................ 3.4 Adding properties ............................................................................................................................. Changing user-defined fields ..................................................................................................... User-defined fields in templates ................................................................................................ Effect on numbering .................................................................................................................. Interpreting objects.inp..................................................................................................................... Fields in objects.inp ................................................................................................................... Customizing message files .............................................................................................................. Customizing parametric profiles....................................................................................................... Interpreting profitab.inp ............................................................................................................. Save defaults ................................................................................................................................... Creating standard files .............................................................................................................. Customizing other files .............................................................................................................. Creating AutoDrawings wizard files ................................................................................................. Unfolding parameters....................................................................................................................... Using flat bars .................................................................................................................................. Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp ...................................................................................... Using market sizes........................................................................................................................... Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat ................................................................................ Example .................................................................................................................................... 3.5 Tekla Structures log files.................................................................................................................. Numbering history log ...................................................................................................................... Interpreting numbering.history ................................................................................................... Overlapping part/assembly series ............................................................................................. Drawing history log........................................................................................................................... AutoDrawings Wizard log................................................................................................................. Viewing log files ............................................................................................................................... Direct access to parts from log files ................................................................................................. Access part pop-up menu ......................................................................................................... 3.6 3.7
71 71 73 73 73 73 73 75 75 77 77 78 78 79 80 81 81 82 82 83 84 85 85 86 86 86 87 88 88 89 89 89 90 90 90
Customizing Tekla Structures............................................................................................................... 74
Log files ................................................................................................................................................ 87
Location of environment files ................................................................................................................ 90 Location of hidden files ......................................................................................................................... 91
Catalogs ................................................................................................... 93
4.1 Things you should know ....................................................................................................................... 93
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Open a model first ............................................................................................................................ The filter ........................................................................................................................................... Saving a modified catalog ................................................................................................................ What is the difference between Update and OK? ............................................................................ 4.2
94 94 94 95
The profile catalog................................................................................................................................. 95 Working with rules ............................................................................................................................ 96 Defining the material of profiles ................................................................................................. 97 Adding a rule .............................................................................................................................. 99 Adding a next level rule ............................................................................................................. 99 Editing a rule ............................................................................................................................ 100 Organizing rules ....................................................................................................................... 100 Deleting a rule .......................................................................................................................... 100 Example: Adding user attributes to rules ................................................................................ 100 Viewing or modifying the profile catalog......................................................................................... 102 Using standardized values for profile dimensions .......................................................................... 103 Adding a profile .............................................................................................................................. 103 Copy an existing profile ........................................................................................................... 103 Creating a new standard profile ............................................................................................... 104 Creating a cross section................................................................................................................. 104 Cross section with no inner contours ....................................................................................... 104 Cross section with inner contours ............................................................................................ 105 Modifying a cross section ............................................................................................................... 105 Different types of chamfer ........................................................................................................ 105 Deleting a cross section ................................................................................................................. 106 Profiles with variable cross sections............................................................................................... 106 Creating a profile with variable cross sections ......................................................................... 107 Modifying a profile with variable cross sections ....................................................................... 108 Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile ............................................................................... 108 Adding user-defined attributes to a profile...................................................................................... 110 Merging profile catalogs ................................................................................................................. 110 Exporting the profile catalog........................................................................................................... 111 Exporting elements from the profile catalog ................................................................................... 111 Importing from previous versions ................................................................................................... 112 Importing the profile catalog ........................................................................................................... 112 What happens to existing profiles? .......................................................................................... 112 User-defined fixed cross section definitions ............................................................................ 113 User-defined attributes ............................................................................................................ 113
4.3
The material catalog............................................................................................................................ 113 Viewing or modifying the material catalog...................................................................................... Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade ....................................................................... Units of measure ...................................................................................................................... Adding a material type.................................................................................................................... 113 114 115 115
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Adding a new material grade ......................................................................................................... Deleting a material grade ............................................................................................................... Defining your own symbols for materials ....................................................................................... Export and import........................................................................................................................... 4.4 Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog............................................................................................. Saving a modified bolt catalog ....................................................................................................... Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies ............................................................................................ Creating studs................................................................................................................................ Merging bolt catalogs ..................................................................................................................... Exporting the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... Importing the bolt catalog............................................................................................................... Upgrading to a new version ..................................................................................................... 4.5 4.6
115 115 116 116 117 119 119 121 122 123 123 123
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs .................................................................................................. 117
The reinforcing bar catalog ................................................................................................................. 124 For the advanced user........................................................................................................................ 124 A closer look at the export file ........................................................................................................ Dos & donts of editing the export file............................................................................................ Importing part of the bolt catalog.................................................................................................... Units used in export and import ..................................................................................................... Bolt length calculation .................................................................................................................... Polybeam length calculation .......................................................................................................... 125 126 126 127 128 131
AutoConnection..................................................................................... 133
5.1 AutoConnection setup ........................................................................................................................ 133 AutoConnection setup.................................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule groups........................................................................................................... AutoConnection rule sets ............................................................................................................... Rules.zxt ....................................................................................................................................... Changing a connection .................................................................................................................. 5.2 AutoDefaults setup......................................................................................................................... Connection properties files............................................................................................................. Saving connection properties .................................................................................................. Access to properties files ........................................................................................................ Defaults.zxt .................................................................................................................................... Priority of rule sets ......................................................................................................................... Editing connection properties......................................................................................................... 5.3 134 135 135 137 137 137 138 139 139 139 140 140
AutoDefaults setup ............................................................................................................................. 137
AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules............................................................................................. 141 Combining and iterating properties ................................................................................................ 143 Limitations ............................................................................................................................... 144 Combining properties ..................................................................................................................... 144
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Iteration with connection check ...................................................................................................... 145 Reaction forces and UDL ............................................................................................................... 147
CNC......................................................................................................... 149
6.1 NC files................................................................................................................................................ 149 Setting up NC files.......................................................................................................................... Defining destination machines for parts ......................................................................................... Defining selection criteria ............................................................................................................... Maximum size .......................................................................................................................... Profile type ............................................................................................................................... Maximum size of holes ............................................................................................................ Defining hole properties ................................................................................................................. Creating NC files ............................................................................................................................ Creating tube NC files .................................................................................................................... Defining the output format and folder ............................................................................................. 6.2 6.3 6.4 150 151 152 153 153 153 154 157 157 158
DSTV................................................................................................................................................... 159 Fittings affect NC data.................................................................................................................... 159 DXF ..................................................................................................................................................... 160 Converting DSTV files to DXF ....................................................................................................... 161 Pop-marks.......................................................................................................................................... 161 Creating pop-marks........................................................................................................................ 161 Pop-mark settings .......................................................................................................................... 162 Pop-marking options ................................................................................................................ 163
6.5
Hard stamps........................................................................................................................................ 164 Creating hard stamps ..................................................................................................................... Hard stamp properties.................................................................................................................... Information contained in hard stamps ...................................................................................... Position of hard stamps ........................................................................................................... Hard stamps for secondary parts ............................................................................................. 164 164 165 165 165
Import and export.................................................................................. 167

7.1 Import and export basics..................................................................................................................... 167 Using import and export ................................................................................................................. Available formats............................................................................................................................ Importing into Tekla Structures ................................................................................................ Exporting from Tekla Structures .............................................................................................. 7.2 168 168 168 172
Conversion files................................................................................................................................... 175 Converting twin profiles .................................................................................................................. 176 Creating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 177 Locating conversion files ................................................................................................................ 177
10
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Sample conversion files ................................................................................................................. 177 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 178 7.3 Importing models ................................................................................................................................ 178 Import tools .................................................................................................................................... Overview of importing models........................................................................................................ Finishing the import ................................................................................................................. Re-importing a model..................................................................................................................... Revision control options .......................................................................................................... Creating reports of import .............................................................................................................. Importing DWG/DXF files............................................................................................................... IFC import ...................................................................................................................................... Importing an IFC model ........................................................................................................... Converting IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects ................................................... CIS import ...................................................................................................................................... CAD import..................................................................................................................................... CAD specific information ......................................................................................................... Creating log files ...................................................................................................................... CAD import file types ..................................................................................................................... SDNF specific options ............................................................................................................. FEM import..................................................................................................................................... FEM specific information ......................................................................................................... FEM import file types ............................................................................................................... DSTV files ...................................................................................................................................... About DSTV ............................................................................................................................ STAAD files.................................................................................................................................... Stan 3d files ................................................................................................................................... Bus import ...................................................................................................................................... Yield stress in FEM import ............................................................................................................. Model dump import ........................................................................................................................ ASCII import................................................................................................................................... ASCII format description ................................................................................................................ Attribute import............................................................................................................................... About input files ....................................................................................................................... Example input file for drawings ............................................................................................... Example input file for parts ...................................................................................................... Data types file .......................................................................................................................... Steelfab import............................................................................................................................... Steelfab specific information ................................................................................................... Fabtrol XML import......................................................................................................................... S-Frame import .............................................................................................................................. About S-Frame imports ........................................................................................................... MicasPlus import............................................................................................................................ MicasPlus specific information ................................................................................................
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
179 179 179 180 181 182 182 182 183 183 185 186 186 186 186 186 187 187 188 188 189 189 190 191 191 191 191 192 194 195 196 197 197 198 198 198 199 199 199 199
11
Eureka LPM import......................................................................................................................... 199 Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 199 Import ELiPLAN status data .................................................................................................... 200 7.4 Exporting files...................................................................................................................................... 201 Exporting 3D DWG/DXF................................................................................................................ Export as .................................................................................................................................. Exporting 3D DGN.......................................................................................................................... Exporting FEM................................................................................................................................ Combine segments (MicroSAS) .............................................................................................. STAAD ..................................................................................................................................... DSTV ....................................................................................................................................... Exporting CIMsteel ......................................................................................................................... Analysis model ......................................................................................................................... Manufacturing model ............................................................................................................... More CIMsteel information ....................................................................................................... Exporting CAD................................................................................................................................ PML ......................................................................................................................................... SDNF ....................................................................................................................................... XML ......................................................................................................................................... PDMS ...................................................................................................................................... Exporting MIS................................................................................................................................. MIS types ................................................................................................................................. MIS list file ............................................................................................................................... Exporting ASCII.............................................................................................................................. IFC export....................................................................................................................................... Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects ............................................. Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file ................................................................ IFC base quantities .................................................................................................................. Exporting user-defined attributes and template attributes as property sets into IFC models .. Exporting a model dump ................................................................................................................ Exporting BVBS.............................................................................................................................. Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format ................................................................................. Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box .......................................................................................... BVBS (78) specification ........................................................................................................... Exporting Unitechnik ...................................................................................................................... Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format ................................................................................ Unitechnik export reference ..................................................................................................... Main ......................................................................................................................................... Unitechnik configuration .......................................................................................................... TS configuration ....................................................................................................................... Line attributes .......................................................................................................................... Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................... Data specification ....................................................................................................................
12
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
202 202 203 204 204 204 204 205 205 206 207 208 209 209 210 211 211 211 212 212 212 213 214 214 215 215 216 218 218 220 221 222 225 225 230 234 236 239 243
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export........................................................................................ 243 Exporting ELiPLAN .................................................................................................................. 243 7.5 Exporting drawings ............................................................................................................................. 245 Layers ............................................................................................................................................ 245 Advanced line type and layer conversion ................................................................................ 247 7.6 Tekla WebViewer................................................................................................................................ 250 Publishing a model as a web page ................................................................................................ Customizing Web Viewer tooltips................................................................................................... Web templates ............................................................................................................................... Emailing WebViewer models ......................................................................................................... Receiving WebViewer models ....................................................................................................... Sending WebViewer links .............................................................................................................. Handling named views ................................................................................................................... Handling clip planes ....................................................................................................................... Hiding and showing objects ........................................................................................................... Full content rendering .................................................................................................................... How to move and zoom? ............................................................................................................... 250 250 252 252 252 252 253 253 255 255 255
Reserved shortcuts ............................................................................... 257

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Common shortcuts.............................................................................................................................. 257 Modeling commands........................................................................................................................... 258 Drawing commands ............................................................................................................................ 259 UCS .................................................................................................................................................... 260 Representation for parts ..................................................................................................................... 260 Representation for component parts .................................................................................................. 261
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
13
14
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Using Tekla Structures effectively
Introduction
With Tekla Structures you do not have to do everything manually. There are many features you can you use to automate your work processes. You will find it useful to read this chapter before starting a project in Tekla Structures. This chapter is a collection of practical suggestions from experienced Tekla Structures users and service personnel on how to use Tekla Structures effectively. You will also find many links to more detailed explanations of the various features discussed here and step-by-step instructions where appropriate. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
In this chapter
Contents
General (p. 15) Modeling (p. 19) Drawings and printers (p. 21) Autosave (p. 22) Customizing the interface (p. 25) Optimizing system performance (p. 29)
1.1 General
This section describes how to make the most of various Tekla Structures features when setting up a project.
Topics
Firm and project folders (p. 16) Catalogs (p. 16) Options (p. 16) Recording and running macros (p. 17)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively
15
Firm and project folders

Before you customize any object properties for specific projects or organizations, create firm and project folders in which to store them. This will save you time setting up future projects and also when you upgrade Tekla Structures.
See also
Project and firm folders (p. 73) Folder search order (p. 70) Predefining part properties (p. 20)
Catalogs
Before you start a project, check that the catalogs you are using conform to the project requirements. Ensure all users access the same catalogs.
See also
Folder search order (p. 70) Catalogs (p. 93) Open a model first (p. 94) The profile catalog (p. 95) The material catalog (p. 113) The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 117) The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 124)
Options
Check that your option settings are set up correctly before you start modeling. Click Tools > Options > Options..., and see the different tabs. Component properties override these settings. Tekla Structures only uses the values set in the Options dialog box if the corresponding fields in the component dialog boxes are empty. Tekla Structures uses the information in the Options dialog box when it creates parts using components.
Example
It is important that profile names are set up correctly so that you can use filters and wizards effectively. If you change settings in the Options dialog box, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to components you subsequently create. Components you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.
In multi-user mode, all users working in the same model have the same option settings as well as other properties, catalogs, etc.
Profile names
In the Preferences tab, profile names are parametric profile prefixes. They must exist in the profile catalog. If you want to use a parametric profile name that does not exist in the catalog, first add it to profile catalog, then enter it here. Tekla Structures uses the Folded plate prefix when you use the Polyplate command in macros. See also The profile catalog (p. 95).
16
Connections
To define the default bolt properties to use in connections, select a Bolt standard and Bolt size. Enter part start numbers in fields Pos1 to Pos4. Cross-check these settings against the numbering series you define to make sure they cannot overlap. If they overlap, Tekla Structures may create two non-identical parts with the same part number. This generates an error in the log file numbering.history.
Edge distance
When you use components, Tekla Structures uses the Factor of bolt edge distance and Element considered fields to check that the bolts it creates are not too close to the edge of a part. Tekla Structures warns you if they are. Check that bolt edge distance is set according to the standard you are using. Use the Element considered field to base edge distance checks on bolt or hole diameter. Default edge distance settings depend on the environment. If you change the default settings, use Save defaults (p. 81) command to save settings in the current model folder.
Units and decimals

Options > Options... > Units and decimals.
To configure how units and decimals are input, output, stored and displayed, click Tools >
Different types of data are separated onto three tabs in the Units and decimals dialog box. Input data appears on the Modeling and Catalogs tabs. Output data appears on the Analysis results tab (output data only relates to structural analysis). The settings on the Modeling tab affect the data you use when using modeling commands, such as copy, move, create grid, create point, part location, and dimensions. Settings on the Catalogs tab affect the data stored in the profile and material catalogs. Settings in the Units and Decimals dialog box have no effect on drawings, reports, or the Inquire and Measure tools. You can use positive exponent notation, but not negative exponent notation.
The number of decimals affects input and storage accuracy. Always use a sufficient number of decimals.
See also
Updating units and decimals in dialog boxes (p. 17)
Updating units and decimals in dialog boxes

To update the units and decimals in a dialog box: 1. 2. 3. 4.
See also
Click Tools > Options > Options... Click Units and decimals in the list of available options. Modify the values on the different tab pages as required. Click OK. Tekla Structures updates the format of units and decimals in all open dialog boxes.
Units and decimals (p. 17)
Recording and running macros

Tekla Structures enables you to record a series of actions from menus, dialog boxes, and shortcuts.
17
Recording a macro
To record a macro: 1. 2. 3. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Enter a Macro name. Click Record.
4. 5.
Perform the actions you want to record. Click Stop to stop recording.
Macros are saved as *.cs files, in the folder defined with the advanced option XS_MACRO_DIRECTORY in the environment-specific initialization files.
The recorded macro is saved in the drawings or modeling folders, depending on in which mode the macro was recorded in.
Creating a macro manually
To manually create a macro file, click Create in the Macros dialog box. This creates an empty macro file, which you can manually edit, or copy and paste commands to it from other macro files. To run a macro: 1. 2. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Select the macro and click Run.
Running a macro
Editing macros
To view or edit a macro: 1. 2. 3. First check that the file type .cs is associated with suitable text editor. Click Tools > Macros... to open the Macros dialog box. Select the macro and click Edit.
18
4.
The macro opens in the associated text editor.
Macros are based on C# commands and in case you want to edit macros, knowledge of C# programming is needed.
Timestamp
If you want to examine the time spent on different tasks while recording macros, use the advanced option XS_MACRO_ENABLE_TIMESTAMP.
Warning messages
Some third party applications may cause unexpected complications, such as unnecessary warning messages, when working with Tekla Structures. Applications that are known to cause complications are anti-spyware programs.
1.2 Modeling
This section explains how to make the most of the various modeling tools and features in Tekla Structures.
Topics
Automating the detailing process (p. 19) Predefining part properties (p. 20) Modeling tools (p. 20) AutoDefaults (p. 21) AutoConnection (p. 21)
Automating the detailing process

If you have a standard way of configuring connections, save time by saving the connection properties once. Store them in firm or project folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 16). Tekla Structures includes AutoConnection and AutoDefaults tools to automate the modeling process. So you can customize Tekla Structures to suit a particular project and the way you work. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults and also AutoConnection (p. 133). There are three levels of automation that you can help you work faster and more accurately.
19
Predefining part properties

If you have additional information you need to include for particular parts, create user-defined attributes. Tekla Structures saves all customized object properties in the current model folder. You can also copy the attribute files to project or firm folders for future use. See Firm and project folders (p. 16) and Parts.
In multi-user mode, all users working on the same model use the same preferences and attribute files.
Example
For beam properties, this technique guarantees that part names are correct. This means you can easily use a wizard to create drawings. See Using AutoDrawings to create drawings and Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 83). Consider developing a naming policy for files containing customized object properties. Then you can easily cut and paste them to firm and project folders. This also makes it easier to manage objects in view filters, selection filters, drawing properties, etc.
Using predefined properties
You can set the properties for macros, connections, and other objects (columns, beams, bolts, etc.) then save them. It is then simple to reload these properties either for current or future projects.
Modeling tools
Customize the properties of modeling tools you use to create objects, rather than changing the properties manually each time.
Example
You know you will use the same type of stairs in several projects. Set up and save the stair modeling tool properties once. When you next need to use that particular stair modeling tool you can just load the pre-defined properties, as shown below. When you apply the modeling tool, Tekla Structures creates exactly the same stairs.
20
Predefined properties See also Getting Started.
AutoDefaults
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply the correct properties to existing connections. Using this technique you are also building your own expertise into the Tekla Structures database, so the entire company benefits from it. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).
AutoConnection
Use the AutoConnection feature to automatically apply connections. You can use AutoConnection to quickly add connections individually, in phases, or projectwide. This is a useful technique when you are working on a large project using many connections, modifying a model, or importing modified profiles. See AutoConnection and AutoDefaults, and also AutoConnection (p. 133).
1.3 Drawings and printers

This section explains how to make the most of the selection filters, wizards and printer catalog settings to standardize drawing creation and printing.
Topics
Drawing properties (p. 21) Layouts and templates (p. 22) Reports and symbols (p. 22) Selection filters (p. 22) Wizards (p. 22) Defining print devices (p. 22)
Drawing properties
Using well-prepared drawing settings and wizards can dramatically reduce the time it takes to create and edit drawings. Define the settings for different types of parts and assemblies carefully. Then the drawings you create are as complete as possible, with little or no need for editing.
21
Examples
Define different assembly drawing settings for columns, beams, secondary beams, plates, bracings and trusses. Define single-part drawing settings for I and H profiles, tubes, round tubes (wrap-around) and plates. Predefine drawing view properties to use additional views in drawings, such as detail, section or plan views. See also Drawing Properties .
Layouts and templates

Plan and define the layouts and templates for drawings you will use before you start a project. See Drawing Layout.
Reports and symbols

Plan and define special reports and symbols you need for a project.
Selection filters
Create your own selection filters to use both when modeling and using wizards to automate drawing creation. You will find it useful to create selection filters for each part with a different name (column, beam, sec.beam, plate, brace, truss, etc.). Use the Selection Filter dialog box to modify existing filters or create your own. See Creating a selection filter.
Wizards
Use wizards to create objects and drawings automatically. See Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 83) and Using AutoDrawings to create drawings.
Defining print devices

Set up print devices before starting the project. See The printer catalog.
1.4 Autosave
Tekla Structures includes the Autosave feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. In addition, we strongly recommend that you implement and test a corporate backup strategy. When restoring system backups, you should always restore an entire copy of a model rather than parts of it. Autosave files have the extension .db1_<user>.
22
In multi-user mode, Autosave is not equivalent to the Save command. Autosave only saves a single users version of the model and does not update the master model.
Topics
Setting Autosave interval (p. 23) Autosave file location (p. 24) Keeping Autosave files (p. 24) Usernames (p. 24) Application error (p. 25)
Setting Autosave interval

You can define Autosave intervals separately for operations performed in drawings and models, and for automatic drawing creation. Click Tools > Options > Options... > General.
The first value defines how often Tekla Structures automatically saves a model or drawing. This number represents the number of menu commands issued. If you create many beams without interrupting the Create > Beam command, it counts as one menu command. Likewise, in drawings, if you create many dimensions with the Create > Horizontal dimension command without interrupting the command, it counts as only one command. The second value is the number of drawings after which Tekla Structures automatically saves your work.
If the interval values are set to less than 2, autosave is disabled.
23
To have the same autosave values for all models, enter the required values to the file standard.opt, located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\ system. Open the file using a standard text editor, such as Notepad. Search for the following rows: dia_autosave.autos_interval dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval Enter the required autosave value for models in the first row, and for drawings in the second row. For example, to have Tekla Structures save the model after every 20 modeling commands and after creating every 10 drawings, enter dia_autosave.autos_interval 20 dia_autosave.autos_draw_interval 10 After you are done, save and close the file.
Autosave file location

To have Tekla Structures store Autosave files in a specific folder, use the advanced option XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY. Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically. You will find the Autosave file in the autosave folder, in a subfolder with the same name as the model. If you do not use this advanced option, Tekla Structures stores Autosave files in the current model folder.
Autosave in multi-user mode
If you are working with multi-user models, have Tekla Structures store Autosave files locally, not in the model folder that is located on a network drive. Set the advanced option XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave. By saving autosave files locally you make sure that if there are problems in the network traffic, you are still able to save your own work.
In multi-user mode, Autosave only saves a single users version of the model and does does not update the master model.
You will notice that in multi-user mode Autosave is much faster than using the Save command. This is because Autosave performs a local save, but the Save command updates the master model.
Keeping Autosave files

By default Tekla Structures deletes Autosave files when you save and close a model. To keep Autosave files, even if you exit Tekla Structures without saving the model, set the advanced option XS_KEEP_AUTOSAVE_FILES_ON_EXIT_WHEN_NOT_SAVING=TRUE.
Usernames
Give all users a different username when working in both single- and multi-user mode. Tekla Structures identifies users by username.
24
Single-user
In single-user mode, if several users with the same username open a model, Tekla Structures does not display a warning. So you risk conflicts when saving the model. In multi-user mode, Tekla Structures saves Autosave files in the master model folder by default with the filename <model>.db1_<user>. So, if several people are using the same username, conflicts are inevitable. See also Multi-user mode (p. 33).
Multi-user
Application error
When you open a model, Tekla Structures automatically checks if the previous session exited normally. If it did not, Tekla Structures prompts whether you want to continue using the Autosave model or the original model.
Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read.

When Tekla Structures displays the warning Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read, it means that hardware problems have damaged the model database. Your hard disk may be damaged. Use autosave or system backup files to restore the model.
1.5 Customizing the interface

Once you are familiar with Tekla Structures, you can create your own toolbars, menu and shortcuts containing the commands you use every day. This section explains how to do this.
Topics
Toolbars (p. 25) Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 27) Creating a user-defined menu (p. 27) Defining shortcuts (p. 28)
Toolbars
In Tekla Structures, both customized toolbars and user-defined menus are user-specific. You can create as many toolbars as you need.
Do not change existing toolbars, particularly the connection toolbars. Instead, create new ones. See Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 27).
25
Managing toolbars
To open the Customize dialog box, click Tools > Customize....
Use the Toolbars tab to reorganize toolbars: move commands from one toolbar to another and even create your own toolbars. The tree on the right contains all available toolbars and displays the commands they include.
Action Add or remove commands
Description In the Customize dialog box, click on a command to select it, then on the toolbar on which you want the command to appear. Click the right arrow to add commands, the left arrow to remove them. In the Customize dialog box, click a command or toolbar to select it, then click Delete. Click Reset to restore the original toolbar. Check Visible to display the toolbar in Tekla Structures. Tekla Structures uses the following icons to indicate if a toolbar is visible or not:
Delete commands or toolbars
Restore original toolbar Display toolbar
Move command in toolbar tree
Use arrow buttons.
26
Icons
Tekla Structures displays the icon for the command you select. By default, the icon is 16x16 pixels. If the icons look too small, check Large icons which are 24x24 pixels. Check Tooltips to see the command name when you hold the pointer over an icon.
Creating a user-defined toolbar

To create your own toolbar: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Limitations
Open a Tekla Structures model. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, click New.... An new toolbar with the name User Toolbar 1 appears in the toolbar tree. You can enter a new name for the toolbar. Click commands on the list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to a toolbar. Use the left arrow to remove commands from a toolbar. Repeat step 3 until you have all the desired commands on the toolbar. Click Close.
If you want to create a user-defined toolbar for drawing commands, create it in the modeling mode, otherwise the toolbar is not saved. See also Toolbars (p. 25) and Creating a user-defined menu (p. 27).
Adding customized icons for macros

You can add customized icons for macros in user-defined toolbars. To add customized icons: 1. 2. Create the bitmap you want to use as the icon. The size of the bitmap needs to be 16x16 pixels. Save the bitmap with the same name as the macro in the same folder as the macro. For example, if you have a macro that is used in modeling, and the name of the macro is RotatePart.cs, save the bitmap as RotatePart.bmp in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Add a new user-defined toolbar. For more information, see Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 27). Enter Macro in the Filter box to display the available macros. Select the desired macro from the list and click the right arrow to add it to the userdefined toolbar you created. Restart Tekla Structures to load the bitmap.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Limitations See also
You can use this functionality only with default-sized icons, not with large icons. Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 27) Recording and running macros (p. 17)
Creating a user-defined menu

Each user can create their own menu, which is always named User. You can only create one user menu per user. To create your own menu: 1. 2. 3. Open a Tekla Structures model. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Click the Menu tab.
27
Click commands on the command list on the left, then the right arrow to add them to the menu. Tekla Structures displays the commands on the menu on the right of the dialog box. 5. Use the left arrow to remove commands from the menu. 6. Use the arrow buttons to move a command up or down the toolbar tree. 7. Use the line button to add a separator line above the selected command. 8. Repeat step 3 until you have added all the desired commands to the menu. 9. Click Close. 10. You must restart Tekla Structures to activate the menu. The menu name is always User.
Limitations
4.
If you want to create a user-defined menu for drawing commands, create it in the modeling mode, otherwise the menu is not saved. See also Creating a user-defined toolbar (p. 27).
Defining shortcuts
If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will find it faster than using the icons and menus. To assign a shortcut to a command: 1. 2. Click Tools > Customize to open the Customize dialog box. Click on the command on the list on the left of the dialog box. Use the Filter list box to find commands easily. Click to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for commands. Use the Shortcut fields to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys. Copy the command to the User menu to activate the shortcut. See Creating a userdefined menu (p. 27). Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box.
3. 4. 5.
Valid shortcut keys
You can use the following keys in shortcuts:
AZ 09 F1F24 Left, Right Up, Down Backspace, Enter, Esc, Tab Insert, Delete, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down Numpad 09 Numpad */+-, (Multiply, Divide, Add, Subtract, Decimal)
To define, for example, + as a shortcut, enter add in the Shortcut field:
Restart Tekla Structures. To execute the command, use the + key on the Numpad. The same procedure applies for Multiply, Divide, Subtract and Decimal. Tekla Structures also includes many predefined shortcuts. See Reserved shortcuts (p. 257).
28
1.6 Optimizing system performance

There are various settings in Tekla Structures that you can modify to improve system performance, which is particularly useful when you are handling large and complex models.
Topics
Virtual memory (p. 29) Display adaptor (p. 29) Solid buffer size (p. 29) How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 30)
Virtual memory
You will probably need to adjust the virtual memory settings in Windows to optimize system performance. The amount of virtual memory you need depends on the size of the model, and the processes you are using. For example, saving in multi-user mode is more memory-intensive than in single user mode.
To prevent data loss, always use identical values for the Initial size and Maximum size of virtual memory.
Display adaptor
Tekla Structures makes use of OpenGL technology, if your display adaptor supports it. You may need to indicate that your display adaptor does not support OpenGL technology. Indications can be: objects displayed incorrectly, or difficulty selecting objects. 1. 2. 3. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced options dialog box. In the Model view category, set the advanced option XS_USE_SOFTWARE_RENDERING to TRUE. Restart Tekla Structures.
Solid buffer size

To improve performance in large models, try increasing the solid buffer size using the advanced option XS_SOLID_BUFFER_SIZE. This results in Tekla Structures keeping more solids in memory, so it does not have to continuously recreate them. This technique uses a little extra memory, but can result in significant increases in speed. In one example, increasing the solid buffer size from 5000 to 20000 decreased the time taken to run the numbering routine by 80%. This advanced option affects many aspects of modeling, drawings and numbering.
If you increase the solid buffer to a size that exceeds the available memory, Tekla Structures uses the hard drive. This slows down the system significantly. Trial and error is the best way to optimize the solid buffer size. See also How Tekla Structures handles solids (p. 30).
29
How Tekla Structures handles solids

One of the factors that affect performance is the number of verteces in objects. For instance, tubes, particularly if they are curved, usually contain a large number of verteces, as can large numbers of round cuts. The key to optimizing performance in these circumstances is to manipulate the settings that affect how Tekla Structures handles solids. Techniques you can try include:
Minimize the number of curved segments in curved beams. A value of 20 or less is usually adequate for the bottom chords. See Bending. Maximize solid buffer size. See Solid buffer size (p. 29). Minimize the number of views, when you create assembly drawings. For instance, avoid using automatic section view creation in an assembly drawing with many tubes. When Tekla Structures creates the cuts, the solids are are actually cut in the drawing, which is time-consuming. When you create assembly drawings, minimize the number of dimensions, as searching for dimension points in tubes is time-consuming. Avoid using automatic dimensioning in trusses. See Dimensioning. It is much faster to use fast, or reference line parts and fast hole and bolt representation. When you want an exact view of the parts, either minimize the work area first, or only the objects you want Tekla Structures to draw with exact lines. See Display settings.
1.7 Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API

You can customize Tekla Structures to suit your needs further by using the Tekla Open API.
Tekla Open API Tekla Open API is a specialized Application Programming Interface (API) developed by Tekla
that enables you to develop applications and additional functionality on the Tekla modeling platform and integrate it into your own environment. Tekla Open API is implemented using Microsoft .NET technology.
Extended applications Examples
Applications that are developed with Tekla Open API to work in conjunction with Tekla Structures are called extended applications. With Tekla Open API you can:

For more information
Record and run user interface actions. By recording and running user interface actions you can automate routine tasks such as creating daily reports. Create automation tools. You can create automation tools for frequently needed objects. With automation tools you can for example create basic structures or add typical details to drawings. Integrate Tekla Structures to other software. You can utilize the Tekla Open API and .NET in transferring information between Tekla Structures and other software, such as Analysis & Design software. Create new functionality. With Tekla Open API, you can create tools that add new functionality to Tekla Structures.
Reference manuals for Tekla Open API, available in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\help\enu:
Tekla.Structures.Analysis
30
Tekla.Structures.Drawing Tekla.Structures.Model Tekla.Structures.Plugins
.NET startup package, available for download in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/BC/ tekla-structures-en/product/openapi/Pages/Default.aspx Extensions Downloads page in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/BC/tekla-structures-en/ product/extended-applications/Pages/Default.aspx
31
32
Multi-user mode
Introduction
You can work on Tekla Structures models in either single-user or multi-user mode. Multi-user mode allows several users to access the same model at the same time. Several users can work on the same project and be aware of the others progress. This eliminates the need for copying and merging models. This chapter describes how to set up a multi-user system and how to work in multi-user mode.
Assumed background Contents
You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
General information on the multi-user mode (p. 33) Modeling in multi-user mode (p. 43) Drawings in multi-user mode (p. 49) Maintenance procedures (p. 50) Access rights (p. 51)
2.1 General information on the multi-user mode

This section explains how multi-user mode works, and how to set up and use Tekla Structures in multi-user mode.
Tekla Structures multi-user mode only runs on TCP/IP-based networks.
Topics
When to use multi-user mode (p. 34) Overview of the multi-user system (p. 35) How multi-user works (p. 36) Setting up the multi-user system (p. 37) Saving in multi-user mode (p. 38)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Multi-user mode
33
Shutting down the model (p. 40) Copying multi-user models (p. 40) Error messages (p. 41) Recommendations (p. 42)
When to use multi-user mode

You can use Tekla Structures in either single-user or multi-user mode. In single-user mode, only one user can work on a model at one time. When modeling a large project, multi-user mode allows many users to work on a model simultaneously.
Advantages
No duplicate models to control, track or store Using only one model reduces on site errors Erection plans based on a single master model Bolt and material lists generated from a single master model Ability to share the workload of large projects among many users Ability to collect model history (see XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY)
Other issues to consider
As with all projects, you need to plan your multi-user project carefully. Some issues to consider are:
Only one user can save to the master model at a time Use a numbering plan. When working with multi-user models, always use the option Synchronize with master model (save-numbering-save) in the Numbering setup dialog box to prevent saving conflicts. Schedule numbering sessions appropriately (it can take some time to number larger models) If possible, assign distinct areas of the model to each user. You should never use a mix of single-user and multi-user setups on one project. Saving a multi-user model in single-user mode deletes changes by other users working on the model, and can also corrupt the model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 38) to find out how saving works in multi-user mode.
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes

You can easily switch between single-user and multi-user modes by using the different options in the Open dialog box. To open a multi-user model in single-user mode: 1. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model. 2. Right-click and select Open as single-user model from the pop-up menu. To open a single-user model in multi-user mode: 1. 2. 3. In the Open dialog box, select the single-user model. Right-click and select Open as multi-user model from the pop-up menu. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the server. In the Open as multi-user model dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
Changing the server of a multi-user model

To change the Tekla Structures server of a multi-user model: 1. 2. 3. In the Open dialog box, select the multi-user model. Right-click and select Change server from the pop-up menu. Tekla Structures asks for the name of the new server. In the Change server dialog box, enter the server name or select it from the list box, and then click OK.
34
If you change the server of a model, but the connection to the new server cannot be established, the old connection is restored.
The file .This_is_multiuser_model located in the model folder defines whether the model is a multi-user or a single-user model. The file includes also the name of the server. You can open the file using any standard text editor.
Overview of the multi-user system

A Tekla Structures multi-user system runs on a TCP/IP network and consists of:
A server computer running xs_server.exe A file server computer containing the master model Client computers running Tekla Structures
The Tekla Structures server

The Tekla Structures server program performs these main tasks:
Distributes ID numbers for new objects Locks the model when somebody saves or numbers the model Identifies client computers
To optimize the performance of a multi-user system, run as few other programs as possible on the Tekla Structures server. This ensures that it processes network requests for object ID numbers efficiently.
Server shutdown
Users should save their working models to the master model before the Tekla Structures server is shut down. If the server closes down before saving the working models, simply restart it, then have users save their working models to the master model. How multi-user works (p. 36) Setting up the multi-user system (p. 37)
See also
35
How multi-user works
The multi-user model consists of a single master model. Each user can access this model and open their own local view of the model. This local view is called a working model. The above image shows one possible configuration of the multi-user system. Any changes a user makes to his working model are local and are not visible to other users until he saves the working model to the master model. The multi-user system can contain several client computers, where users work on their working models. The master model can be located anywhere on the network, including any of the client computers. When you open a multi-user model on a client computer, Tekla Structures makes a copy of the master model and saves it locally on the client computer (a working model). When you click Save to save your working model back to the master model, Tekla Structures: 1. 2. 3. 4. Takes a new copy of the master model and compares your working model with it. Saves the changes in your working model to the copy of the master model (locally). Saves this copy back to the master model. (Other users can now see your changes.) Takes a new copy of the master model and saves it locally as your working model. (You can see your own changes and those uploaded by other users.)
The multi-user model is locked during opening, saving and numbering. When one of the users performs any of these operations, other users cannot perform them during that time.
Locking
To preserve the integrity of the multi-user model, Tekla Structures locks the master model when a user:
Opens the multi-user model Saves a working model to the master model Runs numbering
When you try to save the model when it is locked, Tekla Structures gives you an option to queue for saving until the model is unlocked.
36
If you click Yes, Tekla Structures displays the following message:
Tekla Structures will keep on retrying every 15 seconds until the operation is completed or until you click Cancel.
See also
Saving in multi-user mode (p. 38)
Setting up the multi-user system

The following steps outline how to set up a multi-user system: 1. Install the Tekla Structures multi-user server. For more information, see Multi-user server installation in the Installation Troubleshooting Guide, available in the Extranet and on the Installation DVD. Set up one computer to run the Tekla Structures server program, xs_server.exe. This program must be launched before anybody opens the multi-user model in Tekla Structures. The xs_server.exe program is installed by default in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\MultiUserServer\<version>. 3. 4. 5. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures Multi-user server > Tekla Structures Server to start the Tekla Structures server program. Users can now start working on their copies of the multi-user model. Check the DOS window created by xs_server.exe to check that it is running. This shows all the server activity (for example, who has a model open, etc.). Run the server program from the command prompt using the same command. Click Start on the task bar, select Run... and then type the command.
2.
You can also:
We recommend that you make it a common practice to update the xs_server.exe also when updating the client computers with the latest version of Tekla Structures.
See also
Overview of the multi-user system (p. 35) How multi-user works (p. 36)
37
Saving in multi-user mode

Tekla Structures multi-user mode uses a flexible master model and working model concept, rather than more limiting file-locking technology. See How multi-user works (p. 36) for more information.
Save
Tekla Structures preserves the integrity of the model, even if more than one user edits the same model objects. If two users modify the same object, then save to the master model, the master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model.
To avoid potential save conflicts, have users work on different areas of the model.
Tekla Structures creates connections to the right parts, even if the part is moved by another user.
Autosave
Autosave (p. 22) only saves the working model, not the master model. Other users do not see the modifications you make after an Autosave. In multi-user mode, this makes Autosave much faster than the Save command. Save updates the master model. Use Autosave in the following ways: 1. 2. Click Tools > Options > Options... > General, and define Autosave intervals for operations performed in the drawing and the model. Periodically autosave the model manually. To do so,
create a shortcut for the Autosave command, see Defining shortcuts (p. 28) OR add the command to a toolbar, see Toolbars (p. 25).
Remember to save regularly to the master model by clicking Save.
See also
Error messages (p. 41) Copying multi-user models (p. 40)
Saving model revision comments

You can save model revision comments when working with multi-user models. This means that all objects which have been changed during the last save interval include the revision information in them. You can use this information in filtering and reports. You can also use it to examine which users have modified the objects.
38

Preconditions
The Owner is the user, who has added the object into the model.
History shows when the model has been changed, how the model has changed, who has
made the changes, and the model revision comments. Set the advanced option XS_SAVE_WITH_COMMENT to TRUE in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > Multi-user.
Set the advanced option XS_COLLECT_MODEL_HISTORY to TRUE in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Speed and Accuracy. 1. When you have set the advanced options mentioned above to TRUE, Tekla Structures displays the Model revision comments dialog box when you are saving the model. Enter the desired revision comment and code in the Model revision comment and Model revision code fields.
2. Click OK. Tekla Structures applies the values of this dialog box to parts that were changed after the last save. When you inquire objects, you can see the model revision information in the Inquire Object dialog box. You can use this information also for selection and view filtering.
39
To disable the saving model revision comments, add it to the user.ini file without a value. For more information see Disabling advanced options in an initialization file (p. 58).
Shutting down the model

Do not shut down the computer containing the master model while other users are working on their working models. They will not be able to save their changes to the master model. If this does happen, to avoid losing any changes, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3. 4.
See also
Keep the working model(s) open on the client computer(s). Restart the computer containing the master model. Open the master model on the computer containing it and autosave the model. Click Save on the client computers to save the working models to the master model.
Save (p. 38) Autosave (p. 38)
Copying multi-user models

To copy a multi-user model: 1. 2. 3. 4. Have all users save and close their working models. Click File > Open, right-click the multi-user model and select Open as single-user model. Use Save as to make a copy of the model. Exit Tekla Structures and re-open the model in multi-user mode to continue working on it.
Displaying active multi-users

You can display information on users working on the same server. To do this: 1. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users... The Active Multi-Users dialog box displays the following information:
Field
Locked Model name User Latest login Latest access to server Editing drawings Edited drawings
Description The time when the model was locked. The name of the model. Users that are currently working on models on the server. The time when the users have logged in. The time when the users have last accessed the server. The drawings that are currently being edited. The drawings that have been edited and saved to the server.
40
The Active Multi-Users dialog box is refreshed every 30 seconds. You can refresh it immediately by clicking Refresh.
Clearing locks
You can clear the locks of objects from other users in the multi-user server.
Preconditions
To use this feature you need to define the action AllowMultiuserKick and give full permissions to the users that may clear locks in the file privileges.inp located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\inp. To clear the locks of a user: 1. 2. Click Tools > Active Multi-Users... Right-click a user whose locks you want to clear and select Clear locks from the pop-up menu.
Using this command removes all the locks the user has on objects. This means that if an application error has occurred on the users computer, the locks on locked objects can be cleared.
See also
Locks for drawings (p. 50)
Error messages
This section describes the error messages you might come across when you work in multi-user mode, their probable causes, and possible solutions.
41
Error message
Database write conflicts detected
Problem More than one user has changed an object.
Solution Check the conflict.log. It lists the ID numbers of the objects that more than one user has changed. This is not usually a critical problem. No need to use the Check database tool. See also Save (p. 38).
Could not save model. Possible reasons are: - disk is full or write protected - locked .tmp -file(s) exists in the model directory
You tried to save a multiuser model to a computer or folder that you could not access.
Database locked cannot open model
Check that you have permission to write to the model folder. Check that there is enough disk space to save the model. Restart the computer where you want to save the model. Try to save the model again. Delete the .tmp files from the model directory.
Computer crashed while saving the model, which locks the model.
To unlock the model, the user whose system crashed should open the model in multi-user mode and save it. Do not rename or move Autosave files. Do not open the Autosave file of a single-user model in multi-user mode or vice versa.
Cannot read autosaved model as a normal model in the multi-use mode
The opening of a multiuser Autosave file has been prevented in singleuser mode to prevent the reading of wrong file types.
Recommendations
Here are some recommendations on how to optimize your multi-user setup.
Server computer
The Tekla Structures server does not have a high workload and can be run on a relatively low specification computer. You do not need a commercial network file server. Its main task is to process network requests for object ID numbers. See The Tekla Structures server (p. 35) for more information. Have as much RAM as possible (2 Gb or more). This speeds up saving in multi-user mode. See Save (p. 38) to find out more about the multi-user save process. We also recommend using a fast processor, particularly for computers where you run numbering. LVD (Low Voltage Differential) drives speed up the saving and opening of models).
Client computer
Network
Ensure that the TCP/IP protocols are set correctly:
42
Each PC on the same network has a unique ID number
Each PC on the same network has an identical Subnet mask
To find the IP address of a computer, type ipconfig at the DOS prompt.
Some network operating systems may block user history data, which means that for example the Inquire Object dialog box does not show user names.
Model dump
Always import model dumps in single-user mode. After the import you are prompted to save and re-open the model. Re-open the model as a multi-user model, and continue your work. For more information see Switching between single-user and multi-user modes (p. 34).
2.2 Modeling in multi-user mode

This section describes aspects of modeling in Tekla Structures that are specific to multi-user mode.
Topics
Working with a master model (p. 43) Numbering setup (p. 47) Synchronizing numbering with the master model (p. 48)
Working with a master model

Before you start a project, assign each user an area of the model. To prevent potential save conflicts, you need to avoid having more than one user working on the same, or adjacent model objects. See also Saving in multi-user mode (p. 38).
Example
If three users are to model a project, User #1 could model columns, User #2 the 1st floor beams, and User #3 the 2nd floor beams. In the following example, three users are working on the same model. You can see how modeling and saving works in practice. The master model contains columns and grids, as you can see here. Each user opens the model in multi-user mode. All users are now working on working models, locally.
43
On the working models: User #1 adds base plates to the columns:
User #2 adds and connects the 1st floor steel beams:
44
User #3 adds and connects the 2nd floor steel beams:
User #1 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows the base plates he added and looks like this:
45
User #2 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows his 1st floor framing and User #1s base plates:
User #3 clicks Save to save to the master model. His working model now shows all three userss work:
46
To see the updated master model, Users #1 and #2 need to save to the master model again to update their working models.
Numbering setup
Define the numbering settings as follows: 1. 2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings.... In the Numbering setup dialog box, select the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) check box. When you select this check box, you can cancel the numbering before the last save is made. This is useful, for example, if you want to check the numbering results and you find something that you still want to change.
When working with multi-user models, use this option always to prevent saving conflicts.
3. 4.
Modify the other properties as required. Click OK. Tekla Structures will now save the model before and after you number all parts or modified parts.
When you run numbering by clicking Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Modified Objects, Tekla Structures displays a list that shows the numbering progress. When the numbering is finished, the changed numbering results are highlighted in the list.
47
When you select an item on the list, Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding object(s) in the model. If you keep the F key pressed when you select the item, Tekla Structures fits the work area of the current view around the objects. If the numbering results are correct, click Save numbers to make the second save. To cancel the numbering before the second save, click Cancel. If you cancel the numbering, the model is returned to the state before numbering and standard files are read to all dialogs. To review the numbering results further, click Stop timer. To change the time frame in which Tekla Structures makes the second save, use the advanced option XS_NUMBERING_RESULTS_DIALOG_DISPLAY_TIME.
See also
Controlling access to numbering setup (p. 53)
Synchronizing numbering with the master model

If you need to include numbering information from areas in the model that have been modeled by other users: 1. 2. Ask all users to save their working models. This updates the master model. Number the model. Make sure that the Synchronize with master model (savenumbering-save) check box is selected in the Numbering setup dialog box (see Numbering setup (p. 47)). This updates your working model to the master model, numbers the master model, and then saves the numbered master model for all users to access.
If you create drawings and/or reports after numbering, you need to save the master model again to make them visible to other users.
48
2.3 Drawings in multi-user mode

The multi-user environment is very useful when several users are simultaneously editing drawings. This section describes aspects of drawing production that are specific to multi-user mode.
Topics
About drawing files (p. 49) Guidelines for multi-user drawings (p. 49)
About drawing files

Tekla Structures saves each drawing in a unique file. These drawing files are located in the drawing folder in the master model folder.
The file is in the format D0000123456.dg. dg files are part of the model, so you can only open them using the Tekla Structures drawing editor. dg files contain the locations of views, details of any editing done to the drawing, and the positions of dimensions, part marks, and text. The dg filename does not contain any reference to assembly, part, or multidrawing numbers. If two users open and save the same drawing in their working models, then save their changes to the master model, one set of changes will be lost. The master model will only contain the changes of the user who most recently saved their working model to the master model. See Saving in multi-user mode (p. 38). The Tekla Structures server program xs_server.exe assigns the general arrangement drawing numbers automatically. This means that each drawing gets the first free number available. If users A and B both create a general arrangement drawing at the same time, they are automatically assigned different numbers. The same applies to multidrawing numbers.
Guidelines for multi-user drawings

You may find the following guidelines useful when you edit or check drawings:
Action Saving drawings Editing drawings
Recommendation Periodically save your working model to the master model (every 510 drawings).
Assign each user a different range of drawings to edit. Lock finalized drawings. If Tekla Structures displays the message Database write conflicts detected and a drawing ID number, two or more users have opened and saved the same drawing. See About drawing files (p. 49).
49
Action Checking drawings Printing drawings
Recommendation Only check locked drawings. Make sure that no-one else is working with the same drawing. If you print a drawing while someone else is editing it and then save the model, the other users changes will be lost, even though you have not opened, modified, or saved the drawing. You can disable the print date by using the advanced option XS_DISABLE_DRAWING_PLOT_DATE.
Locks for drawings

When you are about to open a drawing, Tekla Structures displays a notification on the status of the drawing. The options are:
Someone is already editing it. Someone has already edited it (drawing has been saved to their computer, but not yet to the server). The drawing has already been saved and there is a newer version available on the server.
Locks for drawings are only used when a drawing is edited manually, not for example when drawings are automatically edited through cloning.
See also
Clearing locks (p. 41)
2.4 Maintenance procedures

This section contains advice on maintaining your multi-user model.
Topics
Checking multi-user databases (p. 50) Deleting unnecessary drawing files (p. 51)
Checking multi-user databases

To preserve the integrity of your multi-user model, you need to remove any inconsistencies from the multi-user database at regular intervals, for example once a day. This may also fix assemblies with no main part and drawings of unknown (U) type. To remove inconsistencies from a multi-user database: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Have all other users exit the multi-user model. Save your model to receive the modifications of other users. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Repair Model. Save the model. Exit the model.
50
Deleting unnecessary drawing files

Every time you update a drawing, Tekla Structures creates a new drawing (.dg) file in the drawings sub-folder of the model. After that, the previous drawing file is not used. By default all unnecessary drawing files are deleted automatically after seven days. This is defined with the advanced option XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES in the file global_default_env.ini file located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common folder. The time frame after which unnecessary drawing files are deleted can be defined with the advanced option XS_DELETE_UNNECESSARY_DG_FILES_SAFETY_PERIOD.
2.5 Access rights

You can protect user-defined attributes using privileges. You can also protect your model and drawings from accidental changes using a lock attribute. Using the lock attribute and privileges together you can even restrict some users or organizations from modifying your model. For example, you can limit access to the model so that a checker can only change status attributes. Or you could prevent certain users from changing the user-defined attributes used for approval or manufacturing and erection status.
Topics
Locking objects (p. 51) Controlling access to attributes (p. 52) Restricting access to model (p. 53)
Locking objects
To protect objects from being accidentally changed, you can use a user-defined attribute called a lock attribute. You can use it for:
parts (separately for beams, columns etc.) bolts welds specific drawing types project properties phase properties
The lock attribute has two values, Yes and No. When set to Yes, the object is locked and you cannot modify its properties. You can only change the objects user-defined attributes that do not affect numbering. If you try to modify a locked object, Tekla Structures shows the message "There are locked objects, see report. The operation could not be performed." and a report on access rights. To add the lock attribute to the user interface, you need to add the following line in the objects section in the objects.inp:
51
objects.inp
attribute("OBJECT_LOCKED", "Locked:", option,"%s", none, none, "0.0", "0.0") { value("No", 1) value("Yes", 0) }
Make sure that numbering is up-to-date before you lock objects.
For more information on objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 75) and Interpreting objects.inp (p. 78).
Controlling access to attributes

Use the privileges.inp file to control access to user-defined attributes. It is a standard text file that you can open using any text editor. Tekla Structures searches for the file first in the current model folder, then in the folder defined by the advanced option XS_INP. Below is an example file: privileges.inp
attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYA/full attribute:APPROVED_BYCOMPANYB/view attribute:APPROVED_BYeveryonenone attribute:STATUSCOMPANYB/full attribute:STATUSCOMPANYA/view attribute:STATUSeveryonenone
Each row contains three columns, separated by tabs:
Column protected user-defined attribute user
Option
attribute:name
Description Affects the user-defined attribute "name". Check the exact spelling of the name in the objects.inp. All users Affects all users within the network domain "domain". Affects the user "nn" in the network domain "domain". Affects the user "nn". User can change the user-defined attribute. User can view the user-defined attribute, but not change it. The field is grayed out to the user. The user-defined attribute is hidden from the user.
everyone
domain/ domain/nn nn rights

full view
none
52
If you do not set any privileges, all users have full rights. Tekla Structures checks the privilege defaults in the input file privileges.inp when you create a model, and each time you open a model.
Changing rights
If you need to the change the privileges, just change the privileges.inp file and re-open the model. However, you can only change the privileges of the objects the organization owns.
Only the person who created the model can modify its privileges.inp file.
Restricting access to model

To prevent a user from changing object properties, set their access to the lock attribute to none in the privileges.inp. In this example, privileges.inp gives the users "man" and "man2" full rights to lock and unlock objects, but hides that attribute from everybody else: privileges.inp
attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDeveryonenone attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDmanfull attribute:OBJECT_LOCKEDman2full
To protect other user-defined attributes, you need to list them in the privileges.inp.
See also
Locking objects (p. 51) Controlling access to attributes (p. 52)
Controlling access to numbering setup

To prevent unauthorized users from modifying the numbering settings, restrict their access to the numbering properties in the privileges.inp file.
Users can still run numbering even if they have no privilege to modify the numbering settings.
To control access to the numbering properties: 1. Open the privileges.inp file in any text editor. The file is located in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\inp folder. Make the required changes in the file. You can set values to the attribute action:PartnumbersOptions.
2.
53
The option view cannot be used for controlling access to the numbering properties.
3.
Result
Save the file.
If a user who has no privilege to modify properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box tries to access the dialog box, Tekla Structures displays a warning message, which states that the user does not have the required privilege. In this example, only the administrator can modify the properties in the Numbering Setup dialog box:
Example
action:PartnumbersOptions action:PartnumbersOptions
See also
everyone ORGANIZATION\admin
none full
Controlling access to attributes (p. 52)
54
Files and Folders
Introduction
This chapter explains where Tekla Structures stores information. It describes the file types Tekla Structures contains and how to use files to customize Tekla Structures. You will also find out how to use model, project and firm folders effectively. It also explains how the initialization files work and how you can use them to customize Tekla Structures. This chapter also includes information on the various log files and how to interpret them.
Assumed background Organization
We assume that you have experience using Windows Explorer to manage files and folders. You should also know how to use a standard file editor, such as Wordpad. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Initialization files (p. 55) File types and function (p. 60) Folders (p. 70) Customizing Tekla Structures (p. 74) Log files (p. 87)
3.1 Initialization files

Initialization files are used to launch Tekla Structures. They can contain many advanced options that you can use to configure Tekla Structures for different standards and your own style of working. Tekla Structures automatically creates the necessary initialization files during installation.The number of initialization files it creates depends on how many country-specific environments you choose to install. We recommend that you make all your customizations in the user.ini file. This way the customizations are kept when you install the next version of Tekla Structures.
Topics
Storing advanced options settings (p. 56) Structure (p. 58) Creating shortcuts (p. 59)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Files and Folders
55
See also
Advanced options Location of hidden files (p. 91)
Storing advanced options settings

Advanced options settings can be stored in the following files:
Advanced options that you can use for your personal preferences, for example the appearance of the Tekla Structures window, are stored in the options.ini file, located in the folder ..\Users\<user>\AppData\Local\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings (Windows Vista), or in the folder ..\Documents and Settings\<user>\Application Data\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings (Windows XP). Advanced options that can be shared with others are stored in the options.ini file, located in the current model folder. To share your settings with other people, copy your personal options.ini to the system, project or firm folders.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change the setting of an advanced option.
Setting advanced options

Methods
Use advanced options to configure Tekla Structures to suit the way you work, or to comply with specific project requirements or industry standards. You can set advanced options by: Using the Advanced Options dialog box (p. 56) OR Editing the user.ini file (p. 57) We recommend that you only use one of these methods to set advanced options. The advanced option settings in the Advanced options dialog box override those in the initialization files.
If required, Tekla Structures prompts you to restart Tekla Structures when you change the setting of an advanced option.
Using switches
You can use switches with some advanced options, for example, to define the contents of marks. When setting the advanced option in an initialization file, enclose the switch in double percent symbols (for example, %%TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%%). When setting the advanced option in the Advanced Options dialog box, enclose the switch in single percent symbols (for example %TPL:PROJECT.NUMBER%).
Using the Advanced Options dialog box

To set an advanced option using the Advanced Options dialog box: 1. 2. 3. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... to open the Advanced Options dialog box. Browse the categories to find the advanced option you want to set. Set the advanced option, then click Apply or OK in the Advanced Options dialog box.
56
You can retrieve the values defined for advanced options in templates by using the GetValue function. For example, to use different format in output depending on whether you have set the advanced option XS_IMPERIAL, use the following rule:
if(GetValue("ADVANCED_OPTION.XS_IMPERIAL") then format("Formatting options for imperial") else format("Formatting options for metric") endif
Editing the user.ini file

To set an advanced option in the user.ini file: 1. Locate the advanced option in the user.ini file. Check that it is set and has the value you want to use. If it is has, you can stop here.
2. 3.
To change or add the advanced option, follow steps 2 to 5.
Right-click the user.ini file in Windows Explorer and click Open with.... Select a standard text editor from the list of available programs. On a new line, type set, then the name of the advanced option followed by its value in a single line. Tekla Structures only reads lines in the initialization file that start with set. Save user.ini. Restart Tekla Structures to activate the advanced option.
4. 5.
You must restart Tekla Structures after changing the initialization file for the changes to take effect.
Possible values
TRUE FALSE 1 0
Example
set XS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID=TRUE set XS_UNDERLINE_AFTER_POSITION_NUMBER_IN_HARDSTAMP=FALSE set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=1 set XS_SINGLE_USE_WORKING_POINTS=0 set XS_USER_DEFINED_BOLT_SYMBOL_TABLE=bolt_symbol_table.txt
string value (name of the file) number (size of font)
set XS_DEFAULT_FONT_SIZE=12
57
When you are moving to a new version of Tekla Structures, you can use the Migration Wizard to automatically copy your user.ini file to the new version. The Migration Wizard appears once you start Tekla Structures for the first time after installation.
Disabling advanced options in an initialization file

To disable an advanced option, add it to the user.ini file without a value. Do not add any spaces or characters after the equals sign. See the example below:
set XS_SINGLE_CLOSE_DIMENSIONS=
In previous versions you could disable an advanced option by adding "rem" before it. This does not disable the advanced option, if the same advanced option is set in the other initialization files.
rem set XS_AUTOSAVE_DIRECTORY=%XS_RUNPATH%\autosave
Structure
This section describes different initialization files.
teklastructures.in i env_global_defau lt.ini
The file teklastructures.ini in the bin folder starts Tekla Structures. The file env_global_default.ini is used as a default for all environments. New options can be added in this file until they are localized and specified differently in environment-specific initialization files. The env_<environment>.ini files in the environments subfolders contain all the advanced options that have environment-specific settings. The user.ini file is where you save your personal settings. The advanced options in user.ini override those in other .ini files. For example, if you have set the same advanced option in an .ini file in a file in environments subfolder and the user.ini file, Tekla Structures uses the value in the user.ini file.
env_<environme nt>.ini user.ini
See Advanced options for details of all advanced options.
Default settings
teklastructures.ini and the .ini files in the environmentssub folders contain default settings. Tekla Structures creates them automatically during installation. We recommend that you do not modify these files.
Initialization file reading order

The initialization files are read in the following order during startup: 1. 2. Program settings: ../Tekla Structures/<version>/nt/bin/ TeklaStructures.ini Language-specific settings: ../Tekla Structures/<version>/nt/bin/ lang_<CurrentLanguage>.ini
58
3.
Environment and other settings: all .ini files given as program startup parameters (in the given order)
Creating customized initialization files

You can create customer-specific initialization files that include custom settings particular to each customer, a company and/or a single project. You can also create customized initialization files for multi-user mode as needed. To do this: 1. 2. 3.
See also
Open the user.ini file using any standard text editor. Save the file with the required name, such as customer.inior project.ini. Edit the file by adding the required customer settings. Save the modified initialization file.
Location of hidden files (p. 91)
Including other initialization files

Initialization files can include or call other initialization files. You can use this functionality to create shortcuts for different purposes, for example to have different setup files depending on the client you are working for in a project such as fabricators. Below is an example of a project initialization file that calls other initialization files.
MyProject.ini: // The project is based on the default US imperial settings call c:\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\16.0\environments\usimp\env_usimp.ini // ..but our company policy requires these changes call c:\CompanySettings\OurPolicy.ini // ..and the fabricator requires something call c:\Fabricators\Fabricator1.ini // ..and then we let users to make some changes (bg color etc.) call c:\Users\user_%USERNAME%.ini The project shortcut for MyProject: C:\Program Files\Tekla Structures\16.0\nt\bin\TeklaStructures.exe -i \\MyServer\MyProject\MyProject.ini \\MyServer\MyProject\MyModel\MyModel.db1
Creating shortcuts
Shortcuts are used to start teklastructures.exe with defined initializations. The Tekla Structures installation automatically creates shortcuts for the selected environments. To create a project-specific shortcut: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make a copy of the default shortcut. In the Windows Start menu, go to All Programs > Tekla Structures <version> > Tekla Structures <version> <your_environment> and right-click. Select Copy from the pop-up menu. Paste the shortcut to your desktop. Select the shortcut and right-click. Select Properties... from the pop-up menu. Modify the Target of the shortcut by adding the required project initializations to it.
59
You can use the following parameters in shortcuts:
as you need.
-i InitializationFile: Initialization file to be read during startup, for example: -i \\MyServer\MyProject\Project1.ini. You can repeat this parameter as many times ModelToBeOpened: Full path to the model to be opened automatically.
The maximum length of a shortcut is 256 characters. If you have problems with this, you can include other necessary initialization files from your project initialization file instead of adding them to the shortcut. For more information see Including other initialization files (p. 59).
3.2 File types and function

This section describes the various types of file Tekla Structures uses and explains their uses and location.
Topics
Input files (p. 61)
60
Data files (p. 62) DSTV connection properties (p. 64) Messages (p. 65) Profiles (p. 65) Bin (p. 66) Fonts (p. 66) Symbols (p. 66) System (p. 67)
Input files
Tekla Structures uses input files to control dialog boxes, as well as how components work. All input files have the extension inp.
File objects.inp profitab.inp
Description Controls the user-defined attributes Contains available parametric profiles Includes materials and dimensions of available flat bars Contains settings for popmarking Controls access rights. Contains settings for reinforcement marks Contains internal bending types of reinforcing bars and their mapping to area specific bending codes.. Contains settings for analysis and design
More information Adding properties (p. 75) Customizing parametric profiles (p. 80) Using flat bars (p. 85) Pop-mark settings (p. 162) Controlling access to attributes (p. 52)
fltprops.inp
pop_mark_parts. inp privileges.inp rebar_config.in p rebar_schedule_ config.inp
Reinforcing bar bending types
analysis_design _config.inp
Component description files

Tekla Structures uses component description files to define the properties of system components. As a general rule, you should not modify these files, as they affect the operation of system components. See When to modify (p. 61). These files are located in the folder: ..\applications\steel1\ and ..\applications\steel2\ There is one input file for each component toolbar. For example, ts_page_10.inp controls the components on toolbar 10.
When to modify
You will only need to modify component description files in the following circumstances:
61
If you add step profiles to the steps.dat file, you should change the ts_page_10.inp file to reflect those changes. If you do not, Tekla Structures will not display the changes in the Steps dialog box. See also Example 1: Stairs (S82) (p. 62). If you modify the Stanchion connection type used in handrailing (1024). See Example 2: Handrailing (1024) (p. 64) for more information.
Data files
Tekla Structures reads data files from the system folder. See System folder (p. 73). These files contains data used by certain modeling tools and details. They are:
File joints.dat
Description Contains the data used in detail 1024 and modeling tool S76. Used in the Stanchion connection type field Contains the data for railing detail 1025. This information is used in the the railing type field. Contains the data for the modeling tool S83. Used in the Stair type field Contains the data for modeling tool S82. Used in the Step profile field Contains the detail used in modeling tool S99. Used in the fields:
railings.dat stairs.dat steps.dat std_flange_plate s.dat

std_stiffener_pl ates.dat marketsize.dat
Outer flange profile Inner flange profile Top plate profile
Contains the data used in modeling tool S99. Used in the Horizontal stiffener profile field Contains available market sizes for certain material grade. Can be used with fMarketSize() function in the custom component editor. See also Using market sizes (p. 86).
These files affect the operation of modeling tools and details.
Data files and modeling tools

Here are two examples of how data files and modeling tools work together.
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.
Example 1: Stairs (S82)
The modeling tool Stairs (S82) is on component toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file ts_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 61).
62
The entry for Stairs (S82) in the ts_page_10.inp file starts:

attribute("step_index", "j_step_profile", option,"%s", none, none,"0.0", "0.0")
Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Step profile field in the Tekla Structures Stairs (82) dialog box:
{ value("DEFAULT", 1) value("PLAIN50x200", value("PLAIN50x210", value("PLAIN50x220", value("PLAIN50x300", etc... 0) 0) 0) 0)
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file steps.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or modeling tool description files.
The option PLAIN50X200 in the Step profile field in the Stairs (S82) dialog box appears on line two of the ts_page_10.inp file. If you select this option, Tekla Structures reads in the information from line 2 of the steps.dat file.
Line 2
63
You can open data (*.dat) files using a standard text editor. Tekla Structures lists the information in data files in text columns. You will find an explanation of the column names at the beginning of each data file.
Example 2: Handrailing (1024)
Handrailing detail 1024 is on toolbar 10, so we need to look at the file ts_page_10.inp. See Component description files (p. 61). The entry for handrailing 1024 in the file ts_page_10.inp starts:
tab_page("","jd_Parameters",3) { attribute("cut2", "j_railing_type", option, "%s", none, none, "0.0","0.0") Next Tekla Structures lists the options that appear in the Stanchion connection type field in the Handrailing (1024) and Stanchions (S76) dialog boxes: value("j_Default", 2) value("j_auto", 1) value("j_MONO_S", 0) value("j_MONO_SC", 0) value("j_MONO_SO", 0) etc...
Tekla Structures gets additional information to create the object from the file joints.dat. It reads the information in by line number, not name.
Do not change the line order in data files or component description files.
The joints.dat file contains the following fields:
Field
index name joint number attribute name updirection origin type double bolts
Description For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not index number For info only. Tekla Structures reads information in by line number, not name Number of the connection to use Name of the connection attribute file to use If railing type and stringer collide use COLLISION, otherwise use MIDDLE 0 indicates that the connection only uses one bolt group 1 indicates that the connection uses two bolt groups
DSTV connection properties

The file ..\environments\common\inp\dstv.lis contains the properties for different DSTV standard connections.
64
Do not change this file, as the information it contains is based on European standards.
Messages
Tekla Structures uses the information in the message files to display messages in the user interface. The message files for different languages are located in ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\messages. All message files have the file extension ail.
See also Customizing message files (p. 79).
Profiles
Tekla Structures uses ASCII and binary files to manage profiles. Each environment has its own profile folder. For example, ..\environments\uk\profil\ contains the files for managing profiles used in the United Kingdom. You can edit ASCII files using a standard text editor. Information in the binary files can only be changed via the user interface. This section describes the various file types in the ..\profil\ folder.
inp (ASCII)
profitab.inp
The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles. Tekla Structures searches for this file in the standard search order (see Folder search order (p. 70)) and then the folder indicated by the advanced option XS_PROFDB in the initialization file. See also Customizing parametric profiles (p. 80). The file rebar_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radii and the standard hook dimensions. See also The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 124). The file mesh_database.inp contains details of the reinforcement meshes used in concrete structures. See also Reinforcement mesh.
rebar_database.i np
mesh_database.i np
cnv (ASCII)
Tekla Structures uses the information in cnv files to convert materials and profiles when transferring model information using links. For example, when you use the PML or HLI links, Tekla Structures reads the cnv files from the folder indicated by the advanced option XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
lis (ASCII)
Tekla Structures creates lis files when you export bolt, profile and material catalogs. See also Merging profile catalogs (p. 110) and Merging bolt catalogs (p. 122).
65
Binary files
Tekla Structures stores catalog information in the binary files, which have the file extension bin. Tekla Structures searches for these files in the following folder search order
Model Project Firm Folder indicated by the advanced option XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
This means that if Tekla Structures finds binary catalog files in the current model folder it does not use the catalogs located in the folder indicated by the advanced option XS_PROFDB in the initialization file.
If you want to make catalogs available to other users, we recommend that you save catalogs in the project or firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 73). These are the binary catalog files:
File assdb.db profdb.bin matdb.bin screwdb.db
Description Bolt assembly catalog Profile catalog Material catalog Bolt catalog
Bin
The folder ..\nt\bin\ contains Tekla Structures executable files. It also contains some support files for Tekla Structures editors.
Fonts
The advanced option DXK_FONTPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder. It includes the graphic fonts:
romsim romco fixfont
DXK_FONTPATH, even if you configure it to also search other folders.
The Template Editor always searches the folder indicated by the advanced option
The advanced option TEMPLATE_FONT_CONVERSION_FILE points to the the conversion file Tekla Structures uses to map Tekla Structures fonts to Windows fonts. Windows fonts must have the extension ttf and be located in the ..\windows\fonts folder.
Symbols
The folder ..\environments\common\symbols\ contains the Tekla Structures symbol files. There are two types of symbol files, sym and dwg. The Symbol Editor creates sym files. dwg files contain the symbols Tekla Structures displays in rendered views (for example, connection, point and origin symbols).
66
The advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH in the initialization file should point to this folder.
The Template Editor always searches for symbols in the folder indicated by the advanced option DXK_SYMBOLPATH.
System
The folder ..\environments\<your_environment>\system\ includes several file types:
rpt tpl lay
Report templates you create with the Template Editor. Drawing template files you create with the Template Editor.
Layout... option.
Layout definitions you create with the Drawings & Reports > Drawing Settings > Drawing
plotdev.bin
This file contains the print device definitions you create using File > Print... > Printer Catalog.... See The printer catalog. The definitions in the system folder are accesible to all users. You can also save printer definitions in the current model folder or the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 73). Tekla Structures searches for plotdev.bin in the model, project and firm folders, then the folder indicated by the advanced option XS_DRIVER.
Wizard files (dproc)
Tekla Structures wizard files automate drawing creation by performing a series of actions you would otherwise have to perform manually. Wizard files have the file extension dproc. Tekla Structures searches the system folder (see System folder (p. 73)) for wizard files. See also Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 83).
File extensions
The table below contains the filename extensions of the files you save in dialog boxes using the Save as button, or the Save defaults command on the Setup menu.
Filename extension 4d ad adc adcd adcs add adl adp adr ads adv adw
Dialog box name Project Status Visualization Assembly drawing properties Assembly - section view properties Assembly - dimensioning properties Assembly - section symbol properties Assembly - dimension properties Assembly - layout properties Assembly - part properties Assembly - protection properties Assembly - bolt properties Assembly - view properties Assembly - weld properties
67
Filename extension ajm apm asm cbm ccl clm cpf cpl cpn crs csl cudc cudcd cudcomp cudcs cudd cudgr cudl cudnp cudp cudr cudrm cudrp cudv cunpm cupm dia dim fas fdg fhl fms gar gci gd gdcom gdcm gdl gdr gdrp gjm
Dialog box name Assembly - connection mark properties Assembly - part mark properties Assembly - bolt mark properties Concrete beam properties Concrete column properties Column properties Pad footing properties Contour plate properties Concrete panel properties Orthogonal beam properties Concrete slab properties Cast unit - section view properties Cast unit - dimensioning properties Cast unit - component properties Cast unit - section symbol properties Cast unit - dimension properties Cast unit - grid properties Cast unit - layout properties Cast unit - neighbor part properties Cast unit - part properties Cast unit - reinforcement properties Cast unit - reinforcement mark properties Cast unit - protection properties Cast unit - view properties Cast unit - neighbor part mark properties Cast unit - part mark properties Twin profile properties Dimension properties Text file properties DWG/DXF properties Hyperlink properties Drawing frame properties Arc properties Circle properties General arrangement drawing properties General - component properties Cast unit - component mark properties General - layout properties General - reinforcement properties General - protection properties General - connection mark properties
68
Filename extension gpg gln gpl grt ldb ler lev md mvi ncp num pm PObjGrp prf prt rbg rbr rbm rep rev rop sbl scr sm SObjGrp stp txt vf vg vi vjm vnp vp vpm vs vsm vw wd wdcd wdr wjm
Dialog box name Polygon properties Line properties Polyline properties Rectangle properties Drawing export layers Layer properties Level mark properties Multidrawing properties View properties (modeling) Pop-mark properties Numbering setup Part mark properties Object group - representation Project properties Beam properties Reinforcing bar group properties Reinforcing bar properties Reinforcement mesh properties Object representation Revision mark properties Reference object properties Symbol properties Bolt properties Bolt mark properties Object Group - Selection Filter Preferences Text properties View filter properties View grid properties View properties (drawing) View connection mark properties View neighbour part properties View part properties View part mark properties View bolt properties View bolt mark properties View weld properties Single part drawing properties Single - dimensioning properties Single - protection properties Single - connection mark properties
69
Filename extension wld wls
Dialog box name Weld properties Weld symbol properties
3.3 Folders
This section describes how Tekla Structures stores the files associated with a model and explains how to use folders to manage files, including those you customize to project and company specifications.
Topics
Folder search order (p. 70) Model folder (p. 71) System folder (p. 73) Project and firm folders (p. 73) Template folder (p. 73)
Folder search order

When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the associated files in specific folders in a set order. It is important that you locate files in the correct folders. Once Tekla Structures finds the associated files, it stops searching. So files that have the same name but are located lower down the search order are ignored. The folder search order is:
Folder Current model Project Firm System
Defined by The open model advanced option XS_PROJECT advanced option XS_FIRM advanced option XS_SYSTEM
Tekla Structures does not search for certain files in exactly this order. The exceptions are listed below. The table also includes links to more information. The exceptions are:
File (type) objects.inp *.dat files
More information Adding properties (p. 75) Data files (p. 62)
70
File (type) Templates
More information Search order:
XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
Model folder
XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM XS_SYSTEM
For more information, see Template folder (p. 73) Catalogs Profile, bolt, material and reinforcement catalogs. Search order:
Model folder
XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM
Folder indicated by the advanced option

XS_PROFDB
Printer catalog.
Model folder
XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM
Folder indicated by the advanced option

XS_DRIVER
For more information, see Binary files (p. 66).
Do not use the system folder to store customizes files. You will avoid having problems or doing a lot of unecessary work when you upgrade. See System folder (p. 73) and Project and firm folders (p. 73).
Model folder
Tekla Structures stores all files associated with a model in a folder it creates with the same name as the model database file (*.db1). In multi-user mode all users access the same model folder. To view the files in the model folder, click File > Open model folder.
Saved attributes
When you change object properties, templates, reports, connections, etc. and then click Save or Save as in the dialog box, Tekla Structures saves the changed files in the current model folder in the attributes sub-folder. See also Project and firm folders (p. 73) and Folder search order (p. 70). Tekla Structures creates the following files in the model folder:
71
File/extension db1
Description The model database. Tekla Structures uses the filename without the extension to name the model folder. Numbering database. The filename without the extension should be the same as the model folder. Contains user-defined connections and details. Can be copied from one model folder to another. Stores numbering information. Contains interface settings for each user, such as drag and drop settings. When you open a project database, Tekla Structures displays the name in the Open dialog box, if it finds this file in the current model folder. Tekla Structures saves a backup copy of the model databases each time you save the model. To restore a previous version of the model, rename the *.bak file to *.db1. Located in the sub-folder ..\drawings under the model folder. These are drawing files, which include information on how each drawing was created. Tekla Structures also stores information on current drawings in the model database. Opening or printing a drawing opens the corresponding *.dg file. Do not manually delete *.dg files. Tekla Structures deletes *.dg files when you delete a drawing.
db2
xslib.db1
xslib.db2 xs_user.user_name xsdb.xs
bak
dg
xsr nc1
Tekla Structures reports Neutral files in DSTV format for NC tooling machines. The filename consists of the part mark and this extension. You can change the file extension in the NC files dialog box Tekla Structures displays when you click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files.... By default it is nc1.
Log files .This_is_multiuser_ model
See Log files (p. 87) Contains information about the PC running xs_server.exe. Do not alter or delete this file in normal circumstances. If, you move a model to a different server, you should delete this file. Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name.
72
System folder
The system folder contains templates for drawings and reports and object settings and properties. Files in the system folder are read-only. See Project and firm folders (p. 73) and Folder search order (p. 70). The location of the system folder is defined by the advanced option XS_SYSTEM in the initialization file.
Do not store customized files in the system folder. Tekla Structures may replace these files when you install a new release. This is not the case with files in the project and firm folders. See Project and firm folders (p. 73).
Project and firm folders

You can create project and firm folders for customized files. This is a useful technique if you want to store the files for future use, or want to retain them when you install a new release. Property files are always saved in the attributes folder under the current model folder, for example, ..\TeklaStructuresModels\my_building\attributes. You can copy these files to the project or firm folders. See Folder search order (p. 70) for important information on where to locate files. Tekla Structures does not replace files in the project and firm folders when you install a new release, so you retain your customized files without having to cut and paste, or export and import from previous versions. Create firm and project folders for example on the same level as the Tekla Structures folder and make them available in all versions using advanced options: XS_PROJECT and XS_FIRM.
Project folder
The project folder is where you should store files you customize for a particular project.The location of the project folder is defined by the advanced option XS_PROJECT in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 70). You need to create a project folder manually, then edit the advanced option XS_PROJECT to point to that folder.
Firm folder
Use the firm folder to store files customized for a particular organization or company. The location of the firm folder is defined by the advanced option XS_FIRM in the initialization file. See also Folder search order (p. 70). You need to create a firm folder manually, then edit the advanced option XS_FIRM to point to it.
Example
You regularly work for a company that has specific drawing layout standards it expects you to use. Customize the drawing templates once for the company and save them in a sub-folder located under the firm folder. You can then use the customized drawing templates for all future projects for that company. And all users can access the customized files.
Template folder
Tekla Structures searches for the Template Editor v. 3.3 templates and reports in the following order:
73
Folder Folder containing your templates Model Project Firm Environment-specific system templates System
Locations.
Defined by advanced option

XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY
XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY_SYSTEM XS_SYSTEM
To modify the advanced options, click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File
Tekla Structures searches for version 2.2 templates in two locations, in XS_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY and in the first folder containing templates:
model project firm system templates system
When Tekla Structures finds a template in one of these folders, it stops searching.
3.4 Customizing Tekla Structures

This section explains how to customize Tekla Structures. It covers the following subjects: Adding properties (p. 75) Interpreting objects.inp (p. 78) Customizing message files (p. 79) Customizing parametric profiles (p. 80) Save defaults (p. 81) Creating AutoDrawings wizard files (p. 83) Unfolding parameters (p. 84) Using flat bars (p. 85) Using market sizes (p. 86)
See Project and firm folders (p. 73).
74
Adding properties
Many dialog boxes contain user-defined attributes for various objects, including beams, columns, bolts and drawings, in Tekla Structures. You can use the ..\environments\common\inp\objects.inp file to define your own attributes for these objects. Tekla Structures displays these fields when you click User defined attributes or the User attributes tab in the relevant dialog box. You can then use these values in reports and drawings. The objects.inp file reads attributes in order from the folders listed in the table below starting with the model folder:
Folder Model Project Firm System inp
Defined by advanced option
XS_PROJECT XS_FIRM XS_SYSTEM XS_INP
The files are merged so that if there are user-defined attributes in any of the files, they are displayed in the user interface. Tekla Structures merges the files in a way that eliminates duplicate attributes. If Tekla Structures encounters the same attribute name in different objects.inp files, the attribute from the first read objects.inp file will be used.
You should only edit the user-defined fields in the objects.inp file. Do not change other standard field names or values.
For more information
Interpreting objects.inp (p. 78) Fields in objects.inp (p. 78) Locking objects (p. 51)
Changing user-defined fields

You can customize existing User fields shown in dialog boxes. You can also add more userdefined fields. See also User-defined fields in templates (p. 77).
Example
You want to change the name of the user-defined attribute User Field 1 in the Column dialog box, which by default looks like this:
75
1. 2.
Open the objects.inp file using a standard text editor. Find the section:
/******************************************************/ /* Part attributes */ /******************************************************/ Each attribute is listed on a new line and starts with the word attribute. Find the line: attribute("USER_FIELD_1", "j_user_field_1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")
3. 4.
Change the line to read:

attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", string, "%s", no, none, "0.0", "0.0")
Attribute names must be unique. The maximum number of characters in a name is 19.
5. 6.
Save the objects.inp file. Close Tekla Structures and restart the program for the changes to take effect. The Column properties dialog box will now look like this:
76
This change affects dialog boxes of all parts, not only columns.
User-defined fields in templates

This section explains how to use user-defined attributes with Template Editor version 2.2. For more information on how to use user-defined attributes in Template Editor version 3.3, see User-defined template attributes. If you change the name of a user-defined field, or create a new user-defined field, you need to modify the legend_text.fields located in the ..nt\bin\ folder, before you can select the field from a list in the Template Editor. You can also use user-defined fields without modifying the legend_text.fields, if you just type the field name correctly. For the example shown in Changing user-defined fields (p. 75), change legend_text.fields as follows:
Example TITLE3 MY_INFO_1 USER_FIELD_2 USER_FIELD_3 USER_FIELD_4 CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT 40 40 40 40 40
Effect on numbering
You can set whether the user-defined attribute affects numbering or not. See General numbering settings. This is useful when you have members that are identical in all respects, apart from their user-defined attributes.
Consider attribute
If you want Tekla Structures to consider the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option yes in objects.inp, see Interpreting objects.inp (p. 78). In this case, Tekla Structures assigns different marks to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes. You must also change the entry for the field in the Part attributes section of the objects.inp file for the user-defined value to be considered when numbering.
77
Ignore attribute
If you want Tekla Structures to ignore the user-defined attribute when numbering, use the option no in objects.inp. In this case, Tekla Structures assigns the same mark to parts that are identical, but have different user-defined attributes.
Only user-defined attributes of parts affect numbering. User-defined attributes of other objects, such as phases, projects, drawings, etc. do not affect numbering.
Interpreting objects.inp
The main components of objects.inp are shown below. See also Fields in objects.inp (p. 78).
attribute or unique_attibute Attribute name Prompt Affects numbering Default value Type of values Make sure Tekla Structures does not already use the attribute name you use. Consider using a prefix that ensures the name is unique, for example, your initials, or an abbreviation of your company name. Do not use spaces or reserved characters in attribute names. The text you enter in the prompt section of the attribute is exactly what Tekla Structures displays in dialog boxes. Some default attributes have prompts like j_comment, meaning that the prompt comes from the joints.ail message file. For more information, read Messages (p. 65). To include an attribute in a report or template, add the name of the attribute to your layout in the Template Editor. When you run a report or create a drawing, Tekla Structures displays the current value of the attribute.
Fields in objects.inp
The objects.inp file contains the following field names:
78
Field
attribute unique_attribute
Description Regular attribute, which is copied with other part properties. Non-copyable attribute. The value of the attribute is never copied to another part. For example part checking status attributes are usually non-copyable. Attribute name, used to find the attribute value Text Tekla Structures displays in the dialog box
integer, float for numbers string for text option for lists date for date with small calendar date_time_min for date and time [12:00]
attribute_name label_text value_type
with small calendar with small calendar
date_time_sec for date and time [12:00:00] field_format
Definition of the field format in the dialog box. Uses C program terminology:

consider_in_number ing check_switch attribute_value_ma x attribute_value_mi n
"%s" for strings "%d" for numbers
See Effect on numbering (p. 77)

none, check_max, check_min, check_maxmin
The maximum possible value for the attribute The maximum possible value for the attribute
Customizing message files

You can customize message files in Tekla Structures.
Example
The message file by_number.ail contains both prompts and default text (or text strings) that Tekla Structures uses in drawings. If you want to change the text Tekla Structures uses for near side plates from N/S to NS, do the following: 1. 2. Open by_number.ail using a standard text editor. Change the N/S into NS in the following section:
string by_number_msg_no_675 { ... entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); };
3.
Save by_number.ail.
See below for an extract of the by_number.ail file:
79
by_number.ail
string by_number_msg_no_675 { entry = ("chs", "(NS)"); entry = ("csy", "(N/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(vorn)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/C)"); entry = ("fra", "(AV)"); entry = ("cht", "(N/S)"); entry = ("hun", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(N/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "N/S"); entry = ("nld", "(VZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(N/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/L)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/L)"); entry = ("rus", "(N/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(N/S)"); }; string by_number_msg_no_676 entry = ("chs", "(FS)"); entry = ("cht", "(F/S)"); entry = ("csy", "(F/S)"); entry = ("deu", "(hinten)"); entry = ("esp", "(L/L)"); entry = ("fra", "(AR)"); entry = ("hun", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ita", "(F/S)"); entry = ("jpn", "F/S"); entry = ("nld", "(AZ)"); entry = ("plk", "(F/S)"); entry = ("ptb", "(L/P)"); entry = ("ptg", "(L/P)"); entry = ("rus", "(F/S)"); entry = ("enu", "(F/S)");}; {
Customizing parametric profiles

The file profitab.inp defines the names that you can use for parametric profiles in Tekla Structures. You can customize this file to add more parametric profile names. See also The profile catalog (p. 95).
Example
You want to use parametric plate profiles with a different name, PLTE. 1. 2. Open the profitab.inp file in a standard text editor. Add the line:
80
PLTE !
! PL
! +2 !
1 !
2 !
3.
Save profitab.inp to the current model folder and close the file.
See also Project and firm folders (p. 73).
Interpreting profitab.inp
The first block in this file is the column titles. It also contains an explanation of possible values.
Title Prefix Type SO
Description Prefix Tekla Structures uses for the parametric profile. See also Parametric profiles. The parametric profile type, e.g. I profile. Sort order. The available options are:
-1: Decreasing sorting order +1: Increasing sorting order 0: No sorting order 2: Name increasing, value decreasing -2: Name decreasing, value increasing
For example, if your input is PLT200*10 or PLT10*200 and you select 2, the result in the output (such as a report) for both cases is PLT200*10. If you select -2, the result for both cases is PLT10*200. Z MI Unit of measure used when inputting data Minimum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. For example, a rectangular hollow section has sub-types: h*t, h*b*t, h1*b1-h2*b2*t. You define SHS with a minimum of two and a maximum of two parameters. When you use the Prefix option in the Select profile dialog box, you will only have the option h*t. Using the same example, SHS300*200*5 will not be available either. MA Maximum number of parameters you can use in the Select profile dialog box. See MI above for example. Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Used by Tekla Structures to find the generation component. Only used for user-defined parametric profiles. Identifies the modeling tool name.
G3-NAME
Z3-NAME
Save defaults
You may find it useful to create a set of standard files for a new project, or to set up Tekla Structures to suit the way you work. You can copy these standard files to the project or firm folders for future use. See Project and firm folders (p. 73).
81
Many dialog boxes Tekla Structures displays when you are modeling contain properties for objects (beams, columns, modeling tools, etc.). Typically they have a Standard option in the Load list box. By default Tekla Structures uses the settings in the Standard file when applying commands. Use Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults to save a set of Standard files in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates the following files:
File standard.asv standard.clm standard.cpl standard.crs standard.dia standard.fms standard.fpl standard.ler standard.mvi standard.num standard.prf
Dialog box Autosave properties Column properties Contour plate properties Beam/orthogonal beam properties Twin profile properties Plotting frames Bent plate Layer properties Model view properties Setup - Numbering Project properties Numbering and coefficient information from the Options dialog box.
standard.prt standard.scr standard.stp standard.wld
Beam properties Bolt properties Setup - Preferences Weld properties
Creating standard files

You can also create standard files not listed above. Simply change the properties of a file, then save it as standard (use lower case). Tekla Structures saves standard files to the current model folder. See System folder (p. 73) for more on using standard files. See also Project and firm folders (p. 73).
Customizing other files

Tekla Structures also stores a number of files, all of which contain object properties, in the current model folder. Tekla Structures creates these files when you click Save or Save as in dialog boxes.
Example
You change the standard column properties to create a new type of column you call custom1. When you click Save as, Tekla Structures creates the file custom1.clm in the current model folder.
See File extensions (p. 67) for a full list of files Tekla Structures creates in this way.
82
Creating AutoDrawings wizard files

You can create your own AutoDrawings wizard files using any standard text editor. Use the existing wizard files as examples to construct your own. A typical AutoDrawings wizard file includes several sets of drawing requests containing drawing, attribute and part settings to apply to selected objects, as well as a selection filter. The order of sets is important, as Tekla Structures only creates one drawing for each object.
Example
The AutoDrawings wizard file creates an assembly drawing for an object that fulfills the selection filter criteria in one set. Tekla Structures will not create another assembly drawing for that object, even if it matches the criteria of the selection filter in later sets in the same wizard file. Wizard files consist of the following entries. Note the use of parentheses.
set_drawing_type(assembly)
Interpreting a wizard file
This line defines the type of drawing the wizard creates. The drawing type appears in parentheses. The options are:
Option single assembly multi_single multi_single_with_layout multi_assembly multi_assembly_with_layout cast_unit
Creates workshop drawings assembly drawings workshop multidrawings workshop multidrawings with layout assembly multidrawings assembly multidrawings with layout cast unit drawings
set_drawing_attributes(column)
This line tells Tekla Structures which drawing properties to use when creating the drawings. The name of the saved drawing properties appears in parentheses.
set_filter(column_filter)
This line tells Tekla Structures which selection filter to use to select the parts from which to create drawings. The filter name appears in parentheses. See also Creating a selection filter.
create_drawings()
Tekla Structures starts creating the drawings. This line should always appear immediately after the lines set_drawing_type, set_drawing_attributes and set_filter.
Wizard file location
Place the newly created drawing wizard files in the attributes sub-folder in the model folder.
The wizards files that you create manually are also displayed in the Master Drawing Catalog. You cannot create new wizard files in the Master Drawing Catalog by editing the files in a text editor, but you can create them using the rule sets.
See also
Using AutoDrawings to create drawings AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 89) Adding a rule set to Master Drawing Catalog
83
Unfolding parameters
The unfolding parameters define the location of the neutral axis when a profile is unfolded. The neutral axis is a line which runs along the length of a profile where stress and strain are equal to zero. Tekla Structures uses these parameters to create NC files and to display unfolded profiles in single-part drawings. Set these parameters in the conversion file, unfold_corner_ratios.inp, located in the system folder. Here is an example of a simple conversion file:
1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 1 0 90 .7 1 HE300A S235JR 0 180 2 0 1000 .7 2 PL* S235JR 0 200 1 0 90 .6
The parameters must be in a certain order in the conversion file: 1. Type 1 is for polybeams

2. 3. 4.
2 is for plates modelled as polybeams (profile e.g. PLT) 3 is for parts which are not unfolded and folllow the old polybeam calculation (for example the line 3 L* * disables unfolding of L profiles)
Profile (you can use wildcards, too) Material (you can use wildcards, too) Rotation/thickness min for polybeams: the minimum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis for plates: the minimum thickness of plate Rotation/thickness max for polybeams: the maximum angle when the profile is rotated around its longitudinal axis for plates: the maximum thickness of plate
5.
6.
Flag

7.
1 is for sharp folds 2 is for curved bends
Angle/radius min the minimum angle of sharp folds
8.
the minimum radius of curved bends

9.
Angle/radius max the maximum angle of sharp folds the maximum radius of curved bends defines how much the profile stretches or shrinks when unfolded. Ratio = (1 - the relative location of the neutral axis). If only the inner surface of the profile shrinks, the ratio is 1. If only the outer surface of the profile stretches, the ratio is 0. By default, the ratio is 0.5 for length calculation and 0.0 for bending radius calculation.
Ratio
Tekla Structures applies the unfolding ratio if the profile properties are within the range indicated by the minimum and maximum values.
To define the rotation angle, set the work plane by the first three points of the polybeam. Set the rotation angle in the Rotation field in the Beam properties dialog box.
84
Using flat bars

When you have completed the model, you can have Tekla Structures show plates as the equivalent flat bars for manufacturing. Tekla Structures displays the plates as flat bars in reports and drawings. To show plates as flat bars: 1. 2. Set the advanced option XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION=TRUE. Indicate the prefix you want to use for flat bars using the advanced option XS_FLAT_PREFIX. For example, set XS_FLAT_PREFIX=FLAT. To prevent Tekla Structures displaying the profile in metric units in the US Imperial version, add the flat bar prefix to the profitab.inp file as a parametric profile.
3. 4.
Define materials, thickness, and width of available flat bars in the fltprops.inp file. See Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp (p. 85). By default, Tekla Structures only compares plate width with the available flat bar dimensions.
To include plate length, set the advanced option XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO=TRUE. To define the tolerance between the actual and standard gusset width, set the advanced option XS_STANDARD_GUSSET_WIDTH_TOLERANCE. To define the tolerance between the actual and standard stiffener width, set the advanced option XS_STANDARD_STIFFENER_WIDTH_TOLERANCE.
Defining flat bar sizes with fltprops.inp

Use the fltprops.inp file to define flat bar length, width, and material. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. You can also copy it to model, project, or firm folders. If Tekla Structures cannot find the fltprops.inp file, it searches for the file fltprops (without .inp extension). See also Folder search order (p. 70). The first row in the file contains flat bar material definitions (enclosed in quotes " ") followed by plate thicknesses. If you do not define a material, you can use all materials for all flat bars. The following rows define the widths of available flat bars. Units are millimeters. fltprops.inp
5,6,"S235",8,10,"S275J0",10,15 40,45 50,55 60,65 70,75 100,110 200,220
Using the fltprops.inp file above, Tekla Structures displays the following plates as flat bars:
Plate 5x40, 5x45, 6x50, 6x55
Material All materials
85
Plate 8x60, 8x65, 10x70, 10x75 10x100, 10x110, 15x200, 15x220

Connections
Material S235 S275J0
Some connections use the fltprops.inp file to convert plates to flat bars after creating the connection: 40, 41, 42, 47, 71, 78, 101, 102, 105, 106, 111, 123, 130, 132, 161, 162, 163, 164.
Settings
The following advanced options affect flat bar lists:
XS_USE_FLAT_DESIGNATION XS_FLAT_PREFIX XS_CHECK_FLAT_LENGTH_ALSO XS_FLAT_TOLERANCE XS_FLAT_THICKNESS_TOLERANCE XS_USE_NEW_PLATE_DESIGNATION.
Using market sizes

Market size is used in custom components to select a suitable plate dimension (usually plate thickness) from the available market sizes. For example, a plates thickness should match the web of a beam. To use market sizes, you must define a custom component using a custom component editor. 1. 2. In the Variables dialog box, add the function =fMarketSize(material, thickness, extrastep) for a parameter. Define the available material sizes in the marketsize.dat file. See Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat (p. 86) for instructions.
Defining market sizes with marketsize.dat

Use the marketsize.dat file to define available thicknesses (or any other dimension) for each material grade. The file is located in the ..\environments\your_environment\profil folder. You can open it using any standard text editor. A material grade element must begin each row followed by a comma-separated list of available plate thicknesses. These units are described in millimeters. marketsize.dat
S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 SS400,1.6,2.3,3.2,4.5,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38 DEFAULT,6,9,12,16,19,22,25,28,32,38
Example
If the following row is in the marketsizes.dat file: S235JR,6,9,12,16,19,22 then the available market size plate thicknesses for S235JR plates are 6, 9, 12, 16 and 22 mm. So the function =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,0) would return 12, and =fMarketSize("S235JR",10,1) would return 16 (one size up). You can also use the function without entering any size up:
=fMarketSize("SS400",7) which is the equivalent of =fMarketSize("SS400",7,0)
86
3.5 Log files

Tekla Structures writes information to log files when you perform operations such as numbering or saving a model. This section describes these log files and how to interpret them.
All log files are located in the current model folder.
Topics
Tekla Structures log files (p. 87) Viewing log files (p. 90) Direct access to parts from log files (p. 90)
Tekla Structures log files

This section contains information on the following log files in Tekla Structures.
File check_database.l og
Description Tekla Structures writes information to this log file when you use the Correct database command. If inconsistencies are found in a part, the part id is written in this log. You can then access the part using the technique described in Direct access to parts from log files (p. 90). This file lists write conflicts. You can view this file automatically. A write conflict occurs in multi-user mode when more than one user changes an object. History of cloning drawings. History of drawing creation. See Drawing history log (p. 89) for more information. Tekla Structures writes information to this file about the assemblies processed each time you create NC files. If you use the NC file classifier, this log file contains additional information on the process, e.g. which machine you used, etc. Also contains error messages. Only used for cold rolled components, e.g. Albion, Ayrshire, Hispan etc. Tekla Structures writes error messages to this file if transfer macros fail. This file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. See Numbering history log (p. 88) for more information. Tekla Structures writes information to this file each time you save a model.
conflict.log
drawing_cloning. log drawing_history. log dstv_nc.log
filetranerror.lo g
numbering.histor y save_history.log
87
File wizard.log
Description Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run a wizard. See AutoDrawings Wizard log (p. 89) for more information. Contains information on the entire Tekla Structures session (from opening the model to closing it), e.g. errors, which catalogs you are using, etc. Tekla Structures writes information to this file when you run the analysis. Analysis log file contains also information on errors that occur during load distribution.
TeklaStructures. log
analysis.log
See also
Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports
Numbering history log

Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file numbering.history. The file has full details of each time numbering was carried out on the model. Tekla Structures places each session in a different block.
Interpreting numbering.history
The header line of each block contains details of the user who carried out the numbering and the date.
*** Numbering (kke): Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering Compare modified to old parts Compare new to old parts Tolerance: 1.000000
The next lines contain details of the numbering settings used:
Then a list of defined series, prior to numbering. In this example, the first line means that in the series PL/1 the highest part position number is 1 and the highest assembly postion number is 0.
PL/1 B/1 A/1 P/1 /1001 Max Max Max Max Max Part Part Part Part Part 1 1 0 12 2 Max Max Max Max Max Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly 0 0 14 0 0
If both the part and assembly numbers here are not zero and you have set the advanced option XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR to MAIN_PART, there may have been a conflict during numbering.
Tekla Structures then lists information on the parts and assemblies numbered. Column headings appear in this example, they do not appear in the file itself.
Part/ assembly Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Part Numbering Position number ID series Old New 124228 series:P/1 P/9 -> P/13 1541381 series:/2001 /0 -> /2001 1541698 series:/2001 /0 -> /2002 1541760 series:/1001 /0 -> /1005 1541820 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1541879 series:/1001 /0 -> /1004 1541941 series:/1001 /0 -> /1006 1542095 series:/1001 /0 -> /1007 1542129 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542142 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542153 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542164 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542175 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003 1542186 series:/1001 /0 -> /1003
88
Tekla Structures then shows an updated list of the defined series.

/2001 Max Part 2 Max Assembly PL/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly B/1 Max Part 1 Max Assembly A/1 Max Part 0 Max Assembly P/1 Max Part 13 Max Assembly /1001 Max Part 7 Max Assembly 124236 series:A/1 A/11 -> A/15 0 0 0 14 0 0
Assembly
The final line of the block shows the end of the numbering session. If you remove or delete the file numbering.history, Tekla Structures generates a new file with the same name when you next run numbering. The new file does not contain a history of previous numbering sessions.
*** Operation finished Tue Jun 27 10:38:03 2000 Full numbering
Overlapping part/assembly series

Tekla Structures records the error message shown in the following example in the numbering.log when you do not have enough free numbers in the numbering series.
Example Assembly numbering series overlap: Position number 1 in series 0 overlaps with position number 1 in series 1.
See also General numbering settings.
Drawing history log

Use the advanced option XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE in the Drawing properties category in the Advanced options dialog box, to define what information Tekla Structures writes in the numbering history log file. You can use all, or any combination of, these options:
NEW DELETED MODIFIED
Separate the options using the _ character, for example, XS_DRAWING_HISTORY_LOG_TYPE=NEW_DELETED.
AutoDrawings Wizard log

Tekla Structures writes a log file when you run an AutoDrawings wizard. The log file contains information about errors, number of drawings created, commands used etc. You can configure whether or not Tekla Structures creates a log file and how it is displayed using the Advanced tab in the AutoDrawings dialog box.
Create log options:
No
Tekla Structures does not create a log file.

Create
Tekla Structures creates a new log file and deletes the old one.
Append
Tekla Structures adds a new entry to the existing log file.

Display log options:
No
Tekla Structures does not display the log,

With associated viewer
89
Tekla Structures displays the log file in an associated viewer (e.g. Notepad) when you run the wizard. You can edit the log file.
On dialog
Tekla Structures displays the log file in a dialog box when you run the wizard. You can not edit the log file.
Viewing log files

You can configure how Tekla Structures displays log files. Check Tools > Display Log File > With Associated Viewer to show log files in a viewer associated with the file type, e.g. Notepad. Use Tools > Display log file to view the following log files in a dialog box:
Session history log Numbering history log Drawing history log Model history log (save_history.log) Clash check history log Analysis history log
You can also display log files on a toolbar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window by checking Tools > Toolbars > Message Panel.
Direct access to parts from log files

There is a direct link from Tekla Structures log files to the model, so you do not have to search for parts mentioned in the log file. To view parts in log file entries: 1. 2. Click the line in the log file which contains the part. Parts have the prefix id. Tekla Structures highlights the part in the model view.
If multiple part ids or an assembly appear on one line in the log file, Tekla Structures highlights all the parts. You can also select parts on different lines of the log file simultaneously.
Access part pop-up menu

You can also access the pop-up menu of a part straight from the log file: Right-click the part id in the log file. Tekla Structures displays the same pop-up menu that you see when you right click a part in the modeling view.
3.6 Location of environment files

The location of environment files depends on the operating system you are using.
If you are using Windows Vista, the location of the environment files is ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments. If you are using Windows XP, the location of the environment files is ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments.
See also
Environments
90
3.7 Location of hidden files

The following files are located in hidden folders. Do not edit the files listed here unless you are an administrator.
File contentattribu tes.lst
Location ..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\template\settings (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\template\settings (Windows XP)
contentattribu tes_userdefine d.lst
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\template\settings (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\template\settings (Windows XP)
dimension_mark s.sym
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\sym bols\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\sym bols\ (Windows XP)
InquiryTool.co nfig
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\mac ros\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes(Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\mac ros\modeling\InquiryToolAttributes (Windows XP)
objects.inp
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\inp\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\inp\ (Windows XP)
options.ini
..\Users\<user>\AppData\Local\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\<user>\Application Data\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings (Windows XP).
91
File privileges.inp
Location ..\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\inp (Windows XP)
product_finish es.dat
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\system (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\system (Windows XP)
rebar_config.i np
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\system\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\system\ (Windows XP)
TeklaStuctures .lin
..\ProgramData\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\inp\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\All Users\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environme nt>\inp\ (Windows XP)
TilePatternCat alog.dtd
TilePatternCat alog.xml
user.ini
..\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings\ (Windows Vista) ..\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\Tekla Structures\<version>\UserSettings\ (Windows XP)
92
Catalogs
Introduction
Catalogs are databases containing the information you would normally expect to find listed in design code tables, or printed reference material. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project- or company-specific information. Catalogs are available for many environments, with region-specific elements.
In this chapter
This chapter explains how to view and modify catalogs. You will also learn how to add userdefined information to existing catalogs. The final section includes some information on advanced techniques that may be of interest to experienced users. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Contents

How to use this chapter
Things you should know (p. 93) The profile catalog (p. 95) The material catalog (p. 113) The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs (p. 117) The reinforcing bar catalog (p. 124) For the advanced user (p. 124)
You will find it useful to read Things you should know (p. 93) before moving on to subsequent sections.
4.1 Things you should know

This section describes features and processes that are common to all the catalogs. You should read this section before moving on to modifying the catalogs.
Topics
Open a model first (p. 94) The filter (p. 94) Saving a modified catalog (p. 94) What is the difference between Update and OK? (p. 95)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Catalogs
93
Open a model first

You must open a model to view or modify the catalogs, as this action opens the related catalogs.
Which catalog is used?
Several catalogs of each type (profile, material, bolt, etc.) can be stored simultaneously in different locations, so it is important to know which catalog you are using. When you open a model, Tekla Structures searches for the catalog files in a specific order, until they are found.
current model folder project folder firm folder profile folder
The physical location of the project, firm and profile folders are defined in the initialization file by the advanced options shown in the illustration below. XS_PROFDB only applies to the profile catalog. XS_SYSTEM applies to all other catalogs.
The filter
The filter option appears in all the modify catalog dialog boxes.
Use it to specify which entries from a catalog should appear in the tree. The default filter string is the wildcard symbol (*). This displays all items in the catalog.
Using filter strings
To display all parts with names beginning with A, enter A* in the Filter field. To display all parts with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures only shows the elements that satisfy your criteria. See Filtering objectsin the Modeling manual for more on filtering.
Saving a modified catalog

This information only relates to profile and material catalogs. To save changes to a catalog: 1. Click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box.
94
2. 3.
Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changed catalog to the current model folder. Click Cancel to return to the Modify catalog dialog box. To exit without saving changes, click Cancel in the Modify catalog dialog box.
What is the difference between Update and OK?

This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs.
Summary
This table lists the various save and exit functions, together with a brief explanation of what each one does.
Button
Action Saves changes to the catalog in memory until you click OK. Saves changes to the catalog on the hard disk. Used to exit without saving changes. Not currently available in the bolt or plotter catalogs.
How it works
When you first open a model, Tekla Structures reads information from the relevant catalogs on the hard disk and stores it in the computers memory. When you select a material or profile Tekla Structures reads the data from the catalog in memory and displays it in the dialog box. This is a much faster method than accessing the catalog stored on the hard disk. When you change data in the dialog box, the changes appear immediately, but the information is not saved to the catalog in memory until you click Update. Tekla Structures only saves the modified catalog to the hard disk when you click OK to exit the Modify catalog dialog box and click OK in the save confirmation dialog box.
4.2 The profile catalog

Introduction
Tekla Structures stores the analysis and design properties of standard and user-defined profiles in the profile catalog. Standard profiles are ones which can be obtained premanufactured. You can also create user-defined profiles from user-defined cross sections. Parametric profiles have a predefined, hard-coded shape, with one or more parameters to define the size of the profile. Tekla Structures calculates the cross-section shape each time you open the model. You can create parametric profile names and enter dimensions for them. See also Parametric profiles, in the Modeling Manual. To view or modify profiles, click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Tekla Structures displays profiles in a tree structure. Profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA). Different icons denote profile types, rules and profiles within the tree:
95
Icon
Used to show Profile type rule. Different icons show different types. Rule Individual standard profile Individual parametric profile
Pop-up menus allow you to modify the tree.

Before you start Topics
Read Things you should know (p. 93). Working with rules (p. 96) Viewing or modifying the profile catalog (p. 102) Adding a profile (p. 103) Creating a cross section (p. 104) Modifying a cross section (p. 105) Deleting a cross section (p. 106) Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 108) Adding user-defined attributes to a profile (p. 110) Merging profile catalogs (p. 110) Exporting the profile catalog (p. 111) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 111) Importing from previous versions (p. 112) Importing the profile catalog (p. 112)
Working with rules

What is a rule?
A rule filters the information in the catalog according to criteria set in the rule filter. For more information on how the filter works, read The filter (p. 94). For example, in the Modify profile catalog dialog box, profiles are grouped according to profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA) using rules.
96
To change how entries in the profile catalog are grouped, you will need to modify the rules in the profile catalog. Read Adding a rule (p. 99).
Defining the material of profiles

Use the Modify profile catalog dialog box to associate profile types with certain material. You can define which profiles are available for steel parts, concrete parts, or both. This affects which profile types are shown in the Select profile dialog box. For example, if you create a steel part and click the Select... button next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box, certain profile types will appear:
97
To define the material of a profile type: 1. 2. 3. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to modify the profile catalog. In the Modify profile catalog dialog box, select the profile type, for example L profiles. To associate the L profiles with steel, right-click and select Material > Steel from the popup menu. A check mark next to Steel on the pop-up menu indicates that L profiles are available for steel parts.
98
4. 5. 6. 7.
To make the L profiles available also for concrete parts, right-click again and select Material > Concrete. To remove a check mark, select the profile type, right-click, and select Material and the option you want to make unavailable. Click OK to close the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the profile catalog.
Adding a rule
To add a rule to the tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Add rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box. Type in the Rule name. Choose the Profile type to which the rule will be applied. Enter the Name filter string that will define the new rule. As a default the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning all entries. To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. Tekla Structures groups the catalog entries that satisfy your criteria under a new rule.
For more information on filtering, see Wildcards.
Adding a next level rule

A next level rule creates a subgroup under an existing rule. Follow the instructions for Adding a rule (p. 99), but use the option Add next level rule.
99
Editing a rule
To edit a rule: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Edit a rule to display the Profile manager rules dialog box. Modify the rule as required. Read Adding a rule (p. 99) for more on rules. Click OK to return to the Modify profile catalog dialog box.
Organizing rules
Tekla Structures lists profiles in alphabetical order, and rules in the order which you can specify. To change the order in which rules appear: 1. 2. Click File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify... to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Right-click the rule and use the Move Up/Move Down options.
Deleting a rule
To delete a rule from the tree: 1. 2.
See also
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog...to display the Modify profile catalog dialog box. Right-click any existing rule, click Delete a rule. The rule is deleted and you are returned to the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box.
Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 111)
Example: Adding user attributes to rules

You can add user attributes and their conditions and values to profile catalog rules in the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. The user attributes can then be used for example in filtering profiles. In this example you will add a user attribute for historical I profiles to a profile catalog rule. To do this: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Go to the User attributes tab and click Definitions... Click Add in the Modify Profile Properties dialog box. Select the row that was created and modify the properties as follows: Set the Profile type to I profiles.
Set the Property name to HISTORICAL_SHAPE. Set the Symbol to Hist. Set the Label to Historical shape.
100
5. 6. 7.
Click Update and OK. Go to HEA under I profiles in the profile catalog tree structure. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu.
8.
Set the rule properties as follows in the Profile manager rules dialog box: Set the Rule name to Historical shapes.
In Profile type, clear the All profiles check box and select the I profiles check box. Enter HEA* in the Name filter string field. Set the User attribute to HISTORICAL_SHAPE and Equals, and enter Yes in the field next to the two list boxes.
101
9. 10. 11.
Click OK. Historical shapes appears in the tree structure. Select the required historical profile, for example HEA120, in the tree structure. Go to the User attribute tab and set the Value of Historical shape to Yes.
12. 13. 14.
Click Update. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for any other required historical profiles. Click OK to close the Modify Profile catalog dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box.
Historical profiles in the profile tree. For more information
The next time you open the profile catalog, the historical profiles are displayed under
The profile catalog (p. 95) Working with rules (p. 96) The filter (p. 94)
Viewing or modifying the profile catalog

To view or modify the profile catalog: 1. 2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click an existing profile to view or modify it.
Information on profiles is separated into three tabs:

General tab
The General tab has information on profile types and dimensions.
102
Analysis tab
The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method. The User attributes tab is for viewing or entering user-defined attributes for profiles. Read A closer look at the export file (p. 125) for more information.
User attributes tab
Using standardized values for profile dimensions

You can define standardized values for the dimensions of parametric profiles in the industry_standard_profiles.inp file in the ..\environments\*your_environment*\system folder. To use these values, in the Select profile dialog box, select a parametric profile for which you have defined standardized values and select the Use industry standardized values only checkbox. You can select the profile dimensions from a list box in the Value column. You can edit the industry_standard_profiles.inp file using any standard text editor (for example, Notepad). Use the following format:

Example
Profile and profile subtype Parameters separated by spaces Units for each parameter Standardized values for each parameter (own row for each dimension combination)
In the following example we define standardized combinations of dimension values for a C profile:
industry_standard_profiles.inp
C h*b*t h b mm mm 75 35 75 35 75 35 100 40 100 40 100 40 t mm 5 6 7 7 8 9
Adding a profile
There are two ways to create a new profile:
Copy an existing profile. Create a new profile from scratch.
Copy an existing profile

The simplest way to create a new profile is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one, as in the following example.
103
Choose profile type and profile dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. The profile type and profile dimensions (height, width, etc.) affect the connections applied, so a bad profile type, or missing values, may result in problems with connections. Remember that some connections only work for certain types of profiles. Always enter values for h and b, as these values can affect how Tekla Structures display profiles.
Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Find a profile similar to the one you want to create and right-click. A similar profile might be one with the same profile type and subtype as the one you want to create. Click Copy profile. Change the profile name. Modify the profile properties. Click Update and then OK to save your profile. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Creating a new standard profile

Alternatively you can create a new profile.
Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click anywhere in the tree structure and click Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number). Change the profile name. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case in this field. Choose a profile type and profile subtype, then enter the profile properties. Click Update and then OK to save your profile. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
See also
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile (p. 108)
Creating a cross section

Employ user-defined cross sections to create user-defined profiles.
Cross-section data is now stored in the profdb.bin, not the profcs.bin, as in previous versions.
Cross section with no inner contours

To create a cross section with no inner contours: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Crosss Section Using Polygon. Select the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked. Click OK to save the cross section.
104
6.
Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
Cross section with inner contours

To create a cross section with inner contours: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section Using Polygon. Select the corners of the cross section. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Select the corners of the cross-section inner contour. Pick the starting point to close the current polygon. Repeat until all inner contours are selected. Click the middle mouse button. Pick the center point of the cross section. This will serve as the center-line point when used in a profile with user-defined cross sections. Name the cross section in the User profile cross section dialog box, which opens automatically after the center point is picked. Click OK to save the cross section. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
When creating multi-cross-section profiles, it is important to create cross sections with the same number of points, created in the same order.
Example
A pitched I profile needs two cross sections with the same center point height. You can create a pitched profile as illustrated below. The cross-section inner contour and outer contour can be selected either clockwise or counterclockwise.
See also
Modifying a cross section (p. 105) Deleting a cross section (p. 106)
Modifying a cross section

To modify an existing cross section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Sectionto display the Modify Cross Section dialog box. Click on the cross section you want to modify. Modify the cross section point data. Click Update and then OK to save the cross section and exit the dialog box. Click OK to save the changes to the catalog.
Different types of chamfer

You can use different types of chamfer in user-defined profiles. Click Modeling > profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section to open the Modify Cross Section dialog box.
105
Number on the Point properties tab refers to each point picked when the cross section was created, in numerical order. The first point picked is Number 1, the second 2, etc. Click on the down arrow against Number to view or change the properties of each point.
Click on the cross section, then click the down arrow in Chamfer type to choose a chamfer type. The x and y values apply to the chamfer type. For example, for the chamfer to be equal on both sides of the angle, only enter a value for x, as in the illustration above. For an uneven chamfer, enter values for x and y.
Deleting a cross section

To delete a cross section from the catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Polygon Cross Section. Click a cross section. Click Delete. Click OK to exit the Modify cross section dialog box. Click OK in the Save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Profiles with variable cross sections

You can create profiles with variable cross sections using the Profile Editor. You can use a variable cross section profile in the model like any other parametric profile. You can:
Use a sketched cross section with different dimensions at different locations in a profile. Modify the variables of the cross sections and the profile. Save the profile and use it as a parametric profile through the profile catalog. Import and export sketched variable cross section profiles.
106
See also
Creating a profile with variable cross sections (p. 107) Modifying a profile with variable cross sections (p. 108) Importing and exporting sketched cross sections
Creating a profile with variable cross sections

To create a profile with a sketched variable cross section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Create a cross section using the cross section sketch editor. In the Variables dialog box, set Visibility to Show for the dimensions that you want to be visible in the Profile Editor. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Profile with Variable Cross Section. In the Define Profile with Variable Cross Section dialog box, select the cross section you want to use as the start and end cross section of the profile. Click OK. Tekla Structures opens the Profile Editor and the Profile preview view. Under Cross sections of the profile, add cross sections to the profile, or remove selected cross sections. When you click Add, Tekla Structures adds a new cross section at the end of the profile, at the location 1.0. Modify the location of the cross sections. If you have added new cross sections, check that they do not overlap any existing cross sections. Under Cross section variables, define the following: The relative location of each cross section in the profile (using the *.Location variables). For example, start=0.00, middle=0.5, end=1.00. How the cross sections are aligned in the horizontal and vertical direction (using the *.HorPos and *.VerPos variables) How much the cross sections are offset from the alignment (using the *.HorOffset and *.VerOffset variables) Set Visibility to Show for the dimensions that you want to modify when using the profile in a model. Optional: To define cross section dimensions using parameter variables, click Add variable. Save the profile. a Click Save. b In the Save profile as dialog box, enter a unique name for the profile. You cannot include numbers in the profile name, or use the name of a standard profile. c Click OK. Tekla Structures saves the profile in the current model folder.
7.
8.
9. 10. 11.
107
See also
Profiles with variable cross sections (p. 106) Profiles with variable cross sections (p. 106)
Modifying a profile with variable cross sections

To modify a profile that consists of variable cross sections: 1. 2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor... The Component Catalog dialog box opens. Double-click a sketched profile to open it in the Profile Editor. Sketched profiles have the symbol 3. 4.
See also
next to their name.
Modify the profile properties. Click Save.
Profiles with variable cross sections (p. 106)
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile

Only user-defined cross sections are used to create user-defined profiles. Create the cross sections needed before adding a standard user-defined profile.
Read Creating a cross section (p. 104) for more on cross sections.
Single crosssection profile
To create a user-defined profile using a single cross section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box. Enter 1 for the Cross section number and 0.0000 for the Relative location. Click OK to save your profile.
108
8.
Multi-crosssection profile
Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
To create a multi-cross-section profile: Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog.... Right-click an existing profile, click Add profile. Name the profile. The profile name must be in upper case, with no spaces. Tekla Structures will automatically convert lower case text to upper case. 4. Click User-defined, fixed in the Profile type list box. 5. Click the user-defined cross section to be used in the Profile subtype list box. 6. Enter the Cross section number and the Relative location, assigning a new number and location for each one. Relative location values indicate the location of the cross section along the axis: 0.0 for starting end and 1.0 for second end. 7. Use the Add button in the Modify profile catalog dialog box to create more cross sections. 8. Click Update after defining each cross section in the profile. 9. Click OK to save your profile. 10. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog. In a pitched profile, Relative location values are 0.0, 0.5 and 1.0, for cross sections 1, 2 and 3. 1. 2. 3.
Example
Remember, cross sections affect the total weight of the profile.
Choose the profile type and dimensions so that they match the new cross section as closely as possible. Profile type and dimensions affect the connections applied, so the wrong profile type or missing values may result in problems with connections. Some connections only work for certain profiles. Always enter values for h and b as they affect how the profile is displayed.
The values h and b are used when calculating the height of a part in pixels. If the values are 0, the part is drawn as a line. These values are also used when setting the position of the part.
109
Adding user-defined attributes to a profile

In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for profiles. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute. To create a user-defined attribute for a profile: 1. 2. 3. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to open the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions... on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. The dialog box will now look like this:
4.
Click the text under each heading to define the attributes using the following fields:
Field
Profile type Quantity type Order Property name
Comment Click the down arrow to indicate the profile types that the property will be applied to. The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string. The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first. This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template, PROFILE.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear. Example:PAINT_LAYER_THICKNESS
Symbol Label
An abbreviation that can be used for the property, such as Ix, ct, etc. The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.
Merging profile catalogs

The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain customized catalogs from the previous version.
110

See also
Combining catalogs stored in different locations. Sharing information from catalogs with other users.
Exporting the profile catalog (p. 111) Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 111) Importing from previous versions (p. 112) Importing the profile catalog (p. 112)
Exporting the profile catalog

To export the entire profile catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click the Export button. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file. If you type in an existing filename, that file will be overwritten. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Use this method to export the entire profile catalog. If you want to export only part of your catalog, read Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 111).
Exporting elements from the profile catalog

You can also export a branch of the profile tree, i.e. all the profiles grouped under a rule, or a single profile.
Branch
To export a branch of the profile tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the branch to be exported. Click Export profiles. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file.
Single profile
To export a single profile: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Right-click the profile to be exported. Click Export profile. Choose a location for the export file. Type in a name for the file. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Read A closer look at the export file (p. 125) if you are interested in the contents of the export file. You should also read this section if you are considering editing the export file.
111
Importing from previous versions

You cannot import export files created with previous versions of the program. However, profile catalogs from previous versions are automatically converted when a model is opened in the new version. So, to create a suitable export file, open the relevant model in the new version and export the catalog.
Do not save your model in the new version, or you will not be able to open it in the older version.
Importing the profile catalog

To import a profile catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open a model which uses the profile catalog to which you wish to import. Click Modeling > Profiles > Profile Catalog... to display the Modify Profile Catalog dialog box. Click Import. Indicate the location of the file to be imported. Exported catalog files have the file extension lis.
Read Exporting the profile catalog (p. 111) for information on how to create an export file.
What happens to existing profiles?

If an existing profile has the same name as the one being imported, Tekla Structures will give you three options:
Option
Replace Merge
What happens The current profile is deleted, the profile in the file being imported is added. Profile properties that are different in the file being imported are added to the existing profile, all the other properties remain unchanged. Use this option to import only certain attributes of profiles.
Leave
The existing profile is not replaced and the definition in the import file is ignored.
If you select the Apply for all check box, Tekla Structures uses the same option for all the existing profiles that have the same name as the one being imported.
The merge option is a very useful one if you want to import certain elements of the catalog. For example, you could use it to import only the user-defined attributes of a profile.
112
User-defined fixed cross section definitions

Each cross section definition has a unique name and ID number. If, during an import, a cross section is found in the existing profile catalog which has the same name, but different properties, the cross section being imported is renamed (an incremental number is added to the end of the existing name). The new name is also written to the Tekla Structures log file.
User-defined attributes
If a user-defined attribute with a different definition already exists, you will be prompted to replace or leave the existing attribute.
4.3 The material catalog

The material catalog contains information on material grades. Materials are displayed in a hierarchical tree, grouped according to material, e.g. steel and concrete.
Topics
Viewing or modifying the material catalog (p. 113) Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade (p. 114) Adding a material type (p. 115) Adding a new material grade (p. 115) Deleting a material grade (p. 115) Defining your own symbols for materials (p. 116) Export and import (p. 116)
Viewing or modifying the material catalog

To view or modify the material catalog: 1. 2. Click Modeling > Material Catalog to view the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click an existing material to view or modify its properties.
Information on materials is contained on four tabs in the Modify material catalog dialog box.
113
General tab
The General tab has fields for three alternative names (or aliases) for the material. These are usually the material names used in different countries or standards. It also contains the profile and plate density values. The Analysis tab has information on the properties used in structural analysis. The structure is analyzed using the Finite Element Method. The Design tab has information on design-specific properties such as strengths, partial safety factors, etc. Click the correct design code in the Design code list box:
Analysis tab
Design tab
User attributes tab
In addition to general and analysis properties, you can also create your own attributes for material grades. For instance, you might specify paint layer thickness, or the maximum grain size of concrete using a user-defined attribute.
Adding a user-defined attribute to a material grade

To add a user-defined attribute to a material grade: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to open the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click Definitions on the User attributes tab to open the Modify profile properties dialog box. Click Add to add a user-defined attribute. Click the text under each heading and use the list box to define each attribute.
The following fields can be used:
Field
Category Design code Material type Quantity type Order Property name
Comment The material category to which the user-defined attribute will be applied. The design code it comes under. The type of information the user-defined attribute will contain, e.g. weight, area, ratio, string. The order in which user-defined attributes are shown in the dialog box. Smaller values are shown first. This field is saved in the catalog and can be used in reports and templates. When this field is used in a template MATERIAL.PROPERTY_NAME indicates where the property name will appear.
Label
The property name is translated to the label in various circumstances.
114
Units of measure
Set units of measure for both input and output using Tools > Options > Options... > Units and decimals.
Adding a material type

If the tree does not contain the material type you need, you can add material types. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material (e.g. steel) and right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add material. Enter the material properties in the Add material dialog box. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Adding a new material grade

The simplest way to create a new material grade is by modifying a copy of an existing, similar one.
Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material grade similar to the one you wish to create, right-click. Click Copy grade. Change the Material name. Modify the material grade properties. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Alternatively you can create a new material.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Modeling > Material Catalog...to display the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click a material type (e.g. steel), right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Add grade. Change the material grade name in the Selected grade field. Enter the material grade properties. Click OK to save the material grade and exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
Deleting a material grade

To delete a material grade from the catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Modeling > Material Catalog... to display the Modify Material Catalog dialog box. Click a material, right-click to access the pop-up menu. Click Delete grade. Click OK to exit the Modify material catalog dialog box. Click OK in the save confirmation dialog box to save the changes to the catalog.
For more on saving the catalog, read Saving a modified catalog (p. 94).
115
Defining your own symbols for materials

You can replace existing material definitions with your own, which will then be displayed in drawings. Material definitions can contain text, numbers and symbols.
Where are material definitions stored?
User-defined material definitions are stored in the file defined by the advanced option XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE. The suggested filename is material_symbol_table.txt. This file does not exist until you create it. Once this file is created and set for use in the Advanced options dialog box, Drawing properties category, using the advanced option XS_MATERIAL_SYMBOL_REPRESENTATION_FILE, all the named materials in the catalog will be replaced with the ones defined in this file. Each line of the file defines a material, using the syntax:
Material_name symbol_file.sym @ n
Syntax of the material file
Value
material_name symbol_file
Description The name of the material used in the material catalog. The file name of the symbol to be used. This must have the suffix .sym. There is an example of a user-defined symbol at the end of this section. The symbol number. This number is also displayed in the Symbol Editor.
Example
SM400A ud_mat.sym @ 13 A SM400B ud_mat.sym @ 13 B SM490 ud_mat.sym @ 11
When creating your own material definition file, ensure that materials with extended material names are listed before ones with similar, simpler names, or they will both be given the same symbol. For example, SM400B must be listed before SM400. This is an example of a user-defined symbol:
Export and import

The export and import process is the same as for the profile catalog, which is described in Merging profile catalogs (p. 110).
116
4.4 The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs

Bolts are used in a model as predefined assemblies made up of components such as bolts, washers, nuts, etc. The bolt catalog contains bolt assembly elements, such as bolts of different size and length, nuts, washers, etc. The bolt assembly catalog contains bolt assemblies. When bolt assemblies are used in a model, the program automatically handles bolt length, number of washers, nuts, etc.
Topics
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog (p. 117) Saving a modified bolt catalog (p. 119) Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies (p. 119) Creating studs (p. 121) Merging bolt catalogs (p. 122) Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 123) Importing the bolt catalog (p. 123)
Viewing or modifying the bolt catalog

To view individual bolt elements, such as bolts, washers, and nuts: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... to access the Bolt Catalog dialog box.
Filter
The Filter option is used to limit the list of entries from the catalog which are displayed. Read The filter (p. 94) for more on filtering techniques. The Modify bolt catalog dialog box contains a list box. Single click an entry on the list to access its properties.
Bolt catalog dialog box.
Layout
The following table explains the terms used for the properties of bolts, washers and nuts, in the
Term
add. dist
What does it mean? Length of the part of the bolt that protrudes from the nut Thickness of bolt head The length of the threaded part of the bolt shaft Tolerance between the washer inner diameter and the bolt diameter Size of the wrench needed Diameter of the hexagon Calculation thickness of a nut or washer True thickness of a nut or washer
When is this value used? Bolt length calculation
top thick thread len
Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen) This is not used in bolt length calculation (value is 0) if the bolt is fully-threaded. When searching for the correctsized washer for the bolt. Not used in bolt length calculation. Drawing the bolt (e.g. to screen) For information only Used in bolt length calculation For information only
washer tol
span size top diam calc thick real thick
117
Term
inner diam outer diam
What does it mean? Inner diameter of a nut or washer Outer diameter of a nut or washer
When is this value used? For information only For information only
An example of the properties of a typical bolt:
An example of the properties of a typical nut:
An example of the properties of a typical washer:
118
Saving a modified bolt catalog

Click Update to save the changes in memory until OK is clicked. When you modify a catalog and click OK to exit a dialog box prompts for a choice between two options:
The first option saves the modified bolt catalog to the current model folder. The second acts like the Windows Cancel button and does not save the modified catalog.
Viewing or modifying bolt assemblies

To view or modify bolt assemblies: Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... to access the Bolt Assembly Catalog dialog box. Click an entry on the list to access its properties.
119
The Bolt assembly catalog dialog box contains two fields for assembly names, Short name and Standard, which are used in different areas of the program.
Field
Short name
Description This name is used in marking and reports. It is usually the commercial name for a specific bolt. This is the full name and is show in the list box in the Bolt properties dialog box invoked from the model.
When is this value used? Drawing the bolt (e.g. on the screen)
Standard
Bolt length calculation
The illustration below shows the possible components of the assembly. The program chooses the appropriate components when the assembly is used.
120
Does value for additional length affect all or individual diameters? Enter additional length value here. Click here to specify whether the value is absolute or relative to diameter. The value given for additional length can affect either individual or all diameters of one bolt assembly. See the illustration above. The value for length can either be absolute or relative to diameter. See the illustration above.
Defining additional length for bolt calculation
Use the Add. dist... button to control how much of the bolt protrudes from the nut. It is useful for performing a quick update of the entire bolt catalog. This value is used in bolt length calculation.
Clicking Add. dist updates the Add. dist values of all bolts which use the selected bolt standard and have the selected diameter.
For more information, read Bolt length calculation (p. 128).
Creating studs
A stud is special type of bolt that is welded to steel parts to transfer loads between steel and concrete.
121
To create and use studs: 1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Catalog... and create a stud bolt in the bolt catalog. Enter the following properties: Value Name for the stud bolt.
Property
Name Type
Standard
This name is needed when creating bolt assembly for the stud. Shank diameter. Stud length. Stud weight. Head thickness. Head diameter.
Diameter Length Weight top thick top diameter
2.
Click Detailing > Bolts > Bolt Assembly Catalog... and create a stud bolt assembly.
Select the standard for the stud bolt. Set all the other assembly component to NONE. 3. To create studs in the model, create bolts and select the stud assembly standard. For more information see Creating a single bolt.
Merging bolt catalogs

The import and export options work together and are used to merge catalogs. It is a useful technique when:
122
Upgrading to a new version of the program, when you want to retain a customized bolt catalog from the previous version. Read Upgrading to a new version (p. 123) for a specific example of this. Combining bolt catalogs stored in different locations. Sharing information from the bolt catalog with other users.
The export and import method for the bolt catalog is different to that used for the profile and materials catalogs.
Exporting the bolt catalog

To export the entire bolt catalog: 1. 2. 3. Open the model containing the required bolt catalog. Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. Tekla Structures writes the bolt catalog to the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder.
This method exports the entire bolt catalog. To export only part of the bolt catalog, edit the export file to contain only the required elements.
Importing the bolt catalog

To import the bolt catalog: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the model to which you want to import the bolt catalog. Copy the screwdb.lis file you want to import to the current model folder. Click Detailing > Bolts > Import Bolt Catalog to import the bolt catalog file screwdb.lis from the current model folder. Tekla Structures does not replace entries in the existing catalog that have the same names as the entries in the import file. Check the status bar for error messages. To view errors, check the Tekla Structures log by clicking Tools > Display Log File > Session History....
Upgrading to a new version

Example
This is an example of how to use import and export when you upgrade to a new version of Tekla Structures. This technique ensures that you retain any customization made to your existing catalog and that only catalog additions from the new version are merged. Basically you will export the new catalog to your existing one. This prevents Tekla Structures overwriting existing catalog entries, or creating duplicates. The following steps explain how to do this when changing from one version of the program to another.
Do not simply copy and paste the bolt catalog from a previous version over the one in the new version. This will result in additions to the new version being lost.
1.
Open a model in the new version. Do not save the model, or you will not be able to use it in previous versions.
123
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Click Detailing > Bolts > Export Bolt Catalog. The program will create the export file screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Open the same model in the previous version. Click File > Catalog > Bolts > Import. The program imports from the file screwdb.lis in the current model folder. Existing entries with the same name as in the imported catalog are not replaced. The merged catalog is now available in the previous version. To use the merged catalog in the new version, first rename the screwdb.db file in the new version folder \environments\*your_environment*\profil\. Rename the screwdb.db file in the new version, before replacing it with the screwdb.db file from the previous version.
7.
Copy the screwdb.db file (which contains the merged bolt catalog) from the previous version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\ to the new version folder ..\environments\*your_environment*\profil\.
The bolt assembly catalog cannot be exported and imported.
4.5 The reinforcing bar catalog

The reinforcing bar catalog contains details of the reinforcement used in concrete structures. It includes both the standard bending radius and the standard hook dimensions. This section explains how to add, delete and modify entries in the reinforcing bar catalog.
Read Reinforcement in the Detailing Manual for information on how to create reinforcing bars in Tekla Structures. This chapter also contains a detailed explanation of reinforcing bar properties.
The catalog is stored in the file ..\environment\*your_environment*\profil\rebar_database.inp. To modify the catalog, edit this file using any standard text editor.
4.6 For the advanced user

The section provides addtional information on the following subjects. It is aimed at experienced Tekla Structures users.
Topics
A closer look at the export file (p. 125) Dos & donts of editing the export file (p. 126) Importing part of the bolt catalog (p. 126)
124
Units used in export and import (p. 127) Bolt length calculation (p. 128)
A closer look at the export file

This information only relates to the profile and material catalogs and provides additional information on the export file discussed in Exporting elements from the profile catalog (p. 111) and Export and import (p. 116). We will use a typical export file from the profile catalog as an example. Catalog export files have the file extension lis.
Sections of the export file
The export file is divided into specific sections. The first line of the file will be (n is the version number):
PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = n
Do not delete this line. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled.
The next section defines the hierarchical tree structure used to display the contents of the catalog. The next section contains the profiles.
Standard profiles
Most profile types are hard-coded into the program and look like this in the export file (partial entry shown):
PROFILE_NAME = "HEA120"; { TYPE = 1; SUB_TYPE = 1001; COORDINATE = 0.000; "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" "ROUNDING_RADIUS_1" "FLANGE_THICKNESS" "WEB_THICKNESS" "WIDTH" "HEIGHT" 0.000000000E+000 0.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+001 8.000000000E+000 5.000000000E+000 1.200000000E+002 1.140000000E+002
User-defined fixed profiles
User-defined fixed profiles can have more than one cross section. They look like this in the export file:
PROFILE_NAME = "TAN_HK_TEST_2_CS"; TYPE = 998; SUB_TYPE = 253; COORDINATE = 0.000; "EQUIVALENT_TYPE" 11 "FLANGE_SLOPE_RATIO" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_Y" 0.000000000E+000 "ECCENTRICITY_X" 0.000000000E+000 "ROUNDING_RADIUS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "FLANGE_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000 "WEB_THICKNESS_2" 0.000000000E+000
The profile type for user-defined fixed profiles is 998. SUB_TYPE refers to the name of the cross section definition. When importing user-defined fixed profiles, the relevant cross section definitions must be in the same import file as the profile. The cross section definition appears like this in the import file:
125
CROSS_SECTION_NAME = "MY_OWN_PROFILE" POINT_NUMBER = 1; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = -200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; POINT_NUMBER = 2; POINT_X = 200.00; POINT_Y = 200.00; CHAMFER_TYPE = 0; CHAMFER_X = 0.00; CHAMFER_Y = 0.00; User-defined parametric profiles
The geometry of user-defined parametric profiles is defined in the file ..\environments\common\inp\sections.clb. A user-defined parametric profile can only be imported if it is defined in this file. As this type of profile is user-definable, different users may have different definitions.
Dos & donts of editing the export file

There are a few rules to follow when editing the export file.
You will find it very useful to familiarize yourself with the different sections of the export file by reading through A closer look at the export file (p. 125).
Do not delete the line PROFILE CATALOG EXPORT VERSION = 2. If it does not appear in the file, the import will be canceled. The hierarchical tree structure can always be deleted.
Importing part of the bolt catalog

To only import part of a bolt catalog: 1. Follow the steps in Exporting the bolt catalog (p. 123) to create an export file. Make a copy of the export file and give it a different name before you edit it, so that it easier to go back and try again if you do not get it right first time.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Edit the file using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Notice that each item in the catalog is listed on a separate line. Delete the unwanted lines from the file. Do not delete these lines: STARTLIST and ENDLIST. Save the file with the same name and file extension. The filename must be screwdb.lis. Follow the steps in Importing the bolt catalog (p. 123) to import the catalog.
126
Units used in export and import

This list of units Tekla Structures uses when exporting and importing only relates to the profile and material catalogs. You will find it useful if you want to write your own import routines for large amounts of data.
Type Boolean Integer String Ratio Strain Angle Length Deformation Dimension Radius of inertia Area Reinforcement area Transverse reinforcement area Area/unit length Volume Section modulus Moment of inertia Torsion constant Warping constant Force Weight Distributed load Spring constant Mass/length Surface load Strength Stress Modulus Density Moment Distributed moment Rotation spring constant Temperature
Unit (no unit if blank)
degree mm mm mm mm mm2 mm2 mm2/m mm2/m mm3 mm3 mm4 mm4 mm6 N kg N/m N/m kg/m N/m2 N/m2 N/m2 N/m2 kg/m3 Nm Nm/m Nm/rad K (oC)
127
Type Thermal dilation coefficient Factor
Unit (no unit if blank) 1/K (1/oC)
Bolt length calculation

The diagram below shows how Tekla Structures calculates bolt length. A full explanation follows the diagram.
Bolt length calculation uses values from the bolt and bolt assembly catalogs. The following illustration from the Bolt properties dialog box shows the values used in bolt length calculation.
128
Checkboxes indicate if the component is used in the assembly. Washer (1) Washer (2) Washer (3) Nut (1) Nut (2) If unchecked, only a hole will be created
Explanation
1.
The minimum possible length of the bolt is calculated as follows: washer (1) thickness (if checked) + material thickness + washer (2) thickness (if checked) + washer (3) thickness (if checked) + nut (1) thickness + nut (2) thickness + extra length
129
2. 3.
Tekla Structures searches for the closest match in the bolt catalog. The number of fitting washers required (must not exceed 10) is calculated so that the length of the shaft is less than: nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers*washer (3) thickness)
4.
Tekla Structures checks that the bolt found in step 2 is longer than: extra length + nut (1) thickness + material thickness + nut (2) thickness + add. dist (from bolt catalog) + washer (1) thickness + washer (2) thickness + (number of fitting washers * washer (3) thickness)
5. 6.
If the selected bolt does not fulfill the criteria in step 4, Tekla Structures returns to step 2, otherwise it continues on to step 6. The program checks that the selected bolt satisfies all the following conditions Can the thread be inside the material to be connected? Even if this is not allowed, the calculation always allows 3 or 4 mm of thread to be inside the material, depending on bolt diameter. If bolt diameter 24 mm, it allows 4 mm, otherwise it allows 3 mm. Shaft length must be more than: material thickness + extra length + washer (1) thickness (if checked) maximum thread in material allowed (if thread in material = no) = 3 mm or 4 mm
Shaft length is calculated as: Screw length - screw thread length - thread end. Thread end is the part of the bolt between the shaft and the thread. It is calculated as follows:
Diameter of bolt (mm) >33.0 >27.0 >22.0 >16.0 >12.0 >7.0 >4.0 4
Thread end (mm) 10.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 2.5 1.5
130
7. 8.
If the selected bolt does not satisfy all the above conditions, Tekla Structures returns to step 2 and tries the next longest bolt. If the advanced option XS_BOLT_LENGTH_EPSILON is set, the epsilon thickness is added to, or subtracted from, the material thickness, to avoid inaccurate bolt length calculation. As an example, if this value were not taken into account, where the calculated length was 38.001 mm, a 39 mm bolt might be selected. If no value is set, a default value of 0.1 is used.
Polybeam length calculation

This section explains how Tekla Structures calculates the length of a polybeam. Two template fields control the length of a polybeam:
LENGTH = total length - line cuts + fittings
Part and polygon cut do not affect the calculation.

LENGTH_GROSS = total length + fittings
Tekla Structures calculates the length of a beam polygon line between its creation points. Chamfers and fittings are taken into account. Polygon line is either the centerline or reference line, depending on the settings of the advanced option XS_CALCULATE_POLYBEAM_LENGTH_ALONG_REFERENCE_LINE. If the beam ends are fitted or cut skew, Tekla Structures also checks the other edge, even if it would not locate on the polygon line. If the other edge is longer, Tekla Structures adds the measure to the length and if shorter, the length is unchanged. See the example below. This assures that the length is the minimum length needed to fabricate the beam.
Cut Creation point LENGTH Creation point Fitting
131
The thick line represents the length of the polybeam.
The calculation gives a faulty result with a polybeam, which includes cuts or fittings and where the extension of an end segment intersects with another segment of the polybeam.
132
AutoConnection
Introduction
You can use AutoConnection to select and apply a connection to parts in a model, using standard connection properties. AutoDefaults allows you to modify standard connection properties and save them for use in specific circumstances. You can define rule groups and rule sets for both AutoConnection and AutoDefaults to use for different conditions within the model. This chapter introduces AutoConnection, which you can use to automatically create connections in a model. You can use AutoDefaults together with AutoConnection to define connection properties. You can also use AutoDefaults to define connection properties and apply them to a single connection. Before using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults in a working model, we recommend that you create a test model, and create all the connection conditions in it that you need for a particular project. You can then use this test model to check the rules and properties of various connection types. It also acts as a quick reference for connection information. This chapter concentrates on the following topics:
In this chapter
Test model
Contents
AutoConnection setup (p. 133) AutoDefaults setup (p. 137) AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141)
5.1 AutoConnection setup

Introduction
Use AutoConnection to automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions. AutoConnection setup (p. 134) AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135) AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135) Rules.zxt (p. 137) Changing a connection (p. 137)
Topics
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 AutoConnection
133
AutoConnection setup
With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model. For example, you can create separate rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers, and even individual models. By using a rule group to select connections and connection properties, you can create connections automatically, without having to select each connection and define its properties individually.
Tree structure
structure:
To access the AutoConnection Setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree
Icon
Type Rule group
Description The 1st level in the tree shows the rule groups. These are user-definable. They help you to group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models. The 2nd level shows the different predefined framing conditions (connection types). Tekla Structures creates them automatically and you cannot change them. The framing conditions include the following: beam to beam web, beam to beam flange, beam to column web, beam to column flange, beam splice, and column splice.
Framing condition
134
Icon
Type Rule set
Description Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model. The connection to apply if the rule set criteria are met.
Connection
To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection. If you do not want to apply a connection for certain rules sets, right-click the connection name and then select No connection from the pop-up menu.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest.
Restrictions
AutoConnection has the following restrictions:

See also
You can have a maximum of two secondary parts in the connection (for example, you cannot use complex gussets with several secondaries). AutoConnection uses profile height and ID number as the criteria for determining 1. secondary and 2. secondary parts. AutoDefaults only affects connection parts (clip angles, shear tabs, end plates, ), bolts, and welds. AutoDefaults cannot change beam profiles or the connection number.
For more information on rules, see AutoConnection rule groups (p. 135) and AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135). For more information on how to use AutoConnection, see Using AutoConnection.
AutoConnection rule groups

Before using AutoConnection, you need to define rule groups, so that you can group the rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, etc. To create a new rule group: 1. 2. 3. Open your test model. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoConnection Settings.... Right-click an existing rule group, and select New rule group from the pop-up menu. Double-click the group New and rename it. Give it a distinctive name.
Give the rule group a name that reflects the group of connections that you want to create. For example, use the fabricator's name, the project name, or any name that will clearly identify the connection rules that you want to use for a specific model. When you create a new rule group, Tekla Structures automatically adds the framing conditions branches under it (beam to beam web, beam to beam flange etc.).
AutoConnection rule sets

Each framing condition can contain rule sets, which you can use to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model. You only need to create AutoConnection rule sets if you plan to use different connections to connect similar framing conditions.
135
For example, you have beam to beam connections, some require clip angles, others need shear tabs. In this case, you need to set up rule sets to determine where each connection type should be used.
Creating a rule set
To add a new rule set under a framing condition: 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the framing condition. A pop-up menu appears. Select New rule set. A New entry appears in the tree. Give the new rule set a descriptive name. Right-click an existing rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Create additional rule sets. A New entry appears in the tree. Give the new subrule set a descriptive name.
Creating a subrule set
Creating a new rule set or subrule set only adds a rule set to the setup tree. You need to define its contents separately. See AutoConnection (p. 133).
Editing a rule set
You can edit the contents of a rule set (for example, change the name or add rules to it): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Right-click the rule set. A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box. Select a rule from the Available rules list. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set. In the right pane under Rules in rule set, fill in the acceptable values for the rule. You can either define an exact value, or minimum and maximum values. The name you enter in the Rule set name field is shown in the setup tree.
The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest. You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down. For more information on rules, see AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules (p. 141).
136
Rules.zxt
When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder and saves the AutoConnection information in a zipped text file called rules.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available for other models (see also Project and firm folders (p. 73)). Each time you modify AutoConnection setup you need to recopy this file to the firm and/or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.
We do not recommend that you edit the rules.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to zip the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unzipped file.
Changing a connection
To change the connection in a rule set, use the Connection Browser dialog box which lists all the Tekla Structures connections available in the connection toolbars. To open the Connection Browser: 1. 2. 3.
Deleting an item
Right-click a connection in the AutoConnection Setup tree. A pop-up menu appears. Select Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box. Select a connection and click OK to update the tree.
Use the Delete rule set command in the pop-up menu to delete a rule set from the Setup tree. This also deletes its subrule sets.
5.2 AutoDefaults setup

Introduction
Use AutoDefaults to automatically apply connections. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties. AutoDefaults setup (p. 137) Connection properties files (p. 138) Defaults.zxt (p. 139) Priority of rule sets (p. 140) Editing connection properties (p. 140) For more information on how to use AutoDefaults, see Using AutoDefaults.
Topics
AutoDefaults setup
With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different predefined connection properties. When you modify connections (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults setup. Use AutoDefaults to modify standard connection properties and save the modified properties for use in specific situations.
137
Tree structure
To open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box, click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings.... The connection types used in various cases are shown in a tree structure:
Icon
Type Rule group
Description The 1st level in the tree contains rule groups. The rule groups are userdefinable. They help you to group rules according to different standards, projects, manufacturers, and models. The next two levels show all the connections available on the toolbars. They are predefined and you cannot change them. Under each connection you can create rule sets to specify which connection properties to use when specific conditions within the model are met. Every branch in the tree ends with connection properties file(s) (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again. See Saving connection properties (p. 139).
Connection page Connection
Rule set
Connection properties file
Rule sets
You define AutoDefaults rule sets in the same way as AutoConnection rule sets. See AutoConnection rule sets (p. 135). Tekla Structures saves the AutoDefaults rules in the defaults.zxt file in the current model folder. You may want to copy defaults.zxt and all the connection properties files associated with it (for example, sec_0-190.j141) to the firm or project folders to use in other models. See Defaults.zxt (p. 139).
Connection properties files

By default, each connection has a standard properties file which defines the standard properties for the connection (for example, standard.j144). You can save connection properties that you want to use again in separate properties files and give them a distinctive name.
138
Saving connection properties

To save connection properties for later use in similar conditions within the model, you can save them in a properties file: 1. 2. Set the properties you want to save (for example, bolt, profile, material properties). In the Save as field, enter a distinctive name for the connection properties. Enter the same name in the Connection code field and click Save as.
When you save connection properties to use with AutoDefaults, it is a good idea to enter the same name in the Save as and Connection code fields on the General tab. This means you can easily check later which properties Tekla Structures used in specific situations. Tekla Structures does not automatically show the AutoDefault values in the connection properties fields. Tekla Structures creates the properties file in an Attributes subfolder in the current model folder. The filename consists of the name you entered in Save as and the extension .jXXX, where XXX is the connection number (for example, sec_0-190.j141).
Access to properties files

To view the list of properties files for a certain connection: 1. 2. 3. In the AutoDefaults Setup tree, select a properties file (for example, standard.j144). Right-click the selected properties file. A pop-up menu appears. Click Select connection parameters.... Tekla Structures displays the Attribute File List dialog box, containing the existing properties files for the connection.
Defaults.zxt
When you use AutoDefaults, Tekla Structures creates an Attributes sub-folder in the current model folder and saves the AutoDefaults setup in a zipped text file, defaults.zxt. You can copy this file to the project or firm folders to make it available in other models. See also Project and firm folders (p. 73)). Each time you modify the AutoDefaults setup, you need to recopy this file to the firm, or project folders. When you copy this file for use in other projects, remember to restart Tekla Structures to use the new setup.
139
We do not recommend that you edit the defaults.zxt file using a text editor, but if you do so, check that you use the right syntax. The easiest way to unpack the .zxt file is to change the file extension zxt to txt.gz and unpack the file using WinZip. Change the extension back to zxt when you have finished. You do not need to repack the file after editing it, Tekla Structures can also read the unpacked file.
Priority of rule sets

Tekla Structures processes AutoDefaults rule sets in the order in which they appear in the tree, so you can control the selection of properties. Usually, one framing condition, profile type, and orientation can have several property combinations, for example, a different profile height.
Example
For example, if you have properties files and rules for maximum profile heights of 150, 160, 170 and 190 mm, and AutoDefaults is selecting properties for a height of 158 mm, three properties files are valid. AutoDefaults selects the first one to match (in this case, 160 mm). Where there is no match, you will need a default rule and properties file.You should set the default rule so that it does not define the profile height and is the last item in the branch. In this way the default rule will always be the last one to match and any properties file that matches the profile height will override it.
Editing connection properties

To edit connection properties in the AutoDefaults Setup tree: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Right-click a connection standard.j file (for example, standard.j144). A pop-up menu appears. Select Edit connection parameters to open the connection dialog box. Set the properties as you would when manually creating connections. Type a descriptive name for these properties in the Save as text box and click Save as. Use a name that distinguishes these as AutoDefaults setup. Click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to the AutoDefaults setup dialog box. If you click OK to close the dialog box, you need to load the default properties next time you use this connection. This ensures that AutoDefaults can modify the properties.
6. 7. 8.
Right-click the standard.j again. Click Select connection parameters.... The Attribute File List opens. It contains the properties that have been set and saved in the connection dialog box. You can now apply any of the properties that have been saved in a rule set.
140
5.3 AutoConnection and AutoDefaults rules

Introduction
You can use the rules listed in the sections below to accurately select connections and connection properties when using AutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Using these rules you can create your own standards to apply project or company defaults. The general rules are:
General
Profile name: the name in the Name field in the Profile catalog dialog box. Profile type: use the following table to find the correct number:
Profile type I L Z U Plate Round bar Pipe Square pipe C T ZZ CC CW Polygon plate
Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 51
Number of secondaries.
141

Orientation
Number of primaries. Material name.
Depending on the relative angle a beam, the connections can be classified as:
Sloped angle (relative to main part cross section) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part follows the slope of the longitudinal axis of the main part.
Skewed angle (relative to main part longitudinal axis) The longitudinal axis of the secondary part is skewed according to the main part cross section. The angle is the smaller of the angles between the longitudinal axis of the secondary part and the main part Z or Y axis.
Cant angle For rotated secondary parts.
Sloped, skewed, and cant angle value can be 0 - 90 degrees. Do not use negative values.
Dimensions
Profile depth Web depth For profiles with an upper and lower flange, web depth is: h - t1 - t2 - 2*r1 Or, if t2 is zero: h - 2*t - 2*r1 For profiles with one flange, web depth is h - t - r1 - r2.
142

Forces and strengths
Web thickness Flange thickness Shear force Axial force Bending moment
Combining and iterating properties

AutoDefaults includes these features:
Feature Combining
Description You can save connection properties files covering different groups of properties, then use these files to define many rules. For example you can have one file for bolt properties and another for profile properties. Tekla Structures combines the files when it runs AutoDefaults. Tekla Structures tests properties until the connection symbol is yellow or green. Iteration changes connection properties automatically if connection fails, even if the rules would match. If Connection Check is set on, the iteration results in connection properties that have passed the check.
Iterating
Using these features
To use either of these features for a rule set: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefault Settings... Browse the tree and right-click a rules set. Select Edit rule set... Set Parameters files selection to one of the following options:
Option
Use combination of first parameters Iterate until the connection symbol is green Iterate until the connection symbol is yellow Use combination of all parameters
Description Tekla Structures uses the properties files it finds in the first matching sub-rule set and does not check other rule sets. Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol green. Tekla Structures checks sub rule sets until it finds matching properties that leave the connection symbol yellow. Tekla Structures checks all rule sets and uses properties files in all matching rule sets. The order of properties files is important, since the last overrides.
143
The order of files in the tree is important. When Tekla Structures combines the properties files, the most recent files (the lowest in the tree) override previous ones. If you leave properties blank, Tekla Structures does not override previous properties with blank properties.
Limitations
Tekla Structures cannot iterate properties files directly. Use a single iteration rule set with sub rule sets. You cannot have many parallel iteration rule sets. Use a single iteration rule set and place it just before the default rule set. Place the combination rule sets above the iteration rule set in the tree. Combination rule sets can only be one level deep. Tekla Structures disregards empty rule sets, so include at least one rule in each rule set.
See also
Combining properties (p. 144) Iteration with connection check (p. 145)
Combining properties
The AutoDefaults combine feature combines separate properties files into one file. This means you define fewer files, because you use one file for several rules. If files contain different values for the same property, Tekla Structures uses the last property it finds. See the image below.
144
See also
Combining and iterating properties (p. 143)
Iteration with connection check

This example shows how you can use the iteration feature of AutoDefaults. In this example iteration sets the number of bolts according to the result of the connection check. When using this rule group for a connection in the model, AutoDefaults sets the number of bolts until the connection symbol is green.
145
The iteration rule forces Tekla Structures to tests sub rules until the connection symbol is green in the model.
Creating iteration rules
First, create connection properties files for each number of bolts. See Editing connection properties (p. 140). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Click Detailing > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults Settings... Right-click the tree and select New rule group. Click the rule group and rename it to "Iteration example". Browse the tree and find connection 144. Right-click it and select Create additional rule sets.... Right-click the rule set and select Edit rule set..., to open the AutoDefault rules dialog box. Change the Rule set name to "ITERATION". Set Parameters file selection to Iterate until the connection symbol is green. Click OK. To create a rule set "2 bolts", right-click the first rule set and select Create additional rule sets.... Right-click the new rule set and select Edit rule set.... AutoDefault rules dialog box appears. Select rule Secondary 1 depth and set the minimum and maximum depth values for two bolts. Set Parameters file selection to Use combination of first parameters. Click OK. Right-click the connection properties file standard.j144, and click Select connection parameters.. to open the Attribute File List dialog box. Select the properties file for two bolts and click OK. Repeat steps 8 to 13 for other rule sets.
Using rules and check together
You can use the connection check result when applying AutoDefaults with iteration. If a rule matches, but connection do not pass the check and symbol remains red, AutoDefaults continues testing other rules and properties until the connection symbol is green. To apply a rule group and connection check for a connection: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the connection properties dialog box. Load the <Defaults> properties. Click General tab and set AutoDefaults Rule Group to the "Iteration example" you created. Click Design type tab and set Connection check to Yes.
146
5. 6.
Checking
Enter the load from secondary members in the fields Shear, Tension, Moment. Click OK to create the connection.
To see which rules AutoDefaults used, right-click the connection symbol, and select Inquire. To see which values AutoDefaults set, double-click the connection symbol to open the connection dialog box, select <AutoDefaults>, then click Load.
Reaction forces and UDL

You can save reaction forces:

Using reaction forces
In the user-defined attributes of a part (for AutoConnection and AutoDefaults). On the Design tab in the connection dialog box (for AutoDefaults).
When you use reaction forces in a rule and AutoDefaults is activate, Tekla Structures first searches for reaction forces in the corresponding connections properties. If they do not contain reaction forces, Tekla Structures searches the user-defined attributes of the secondary part of the connection. If Tekla Structures finds no forces there, you cannot use reaction force rules. Shear force calculation is the exception. If you have not given any reaction force values, shear force is calculated using the UDL shear force routine. The UDL calculation is based on the AISC ASD Specification and is mainly intended for use with imperial units. It uses the yield stress value, profile dimensions, and UDL percentage to calculate the maximum allowable shear force. Tekla Structures compares the result with the Shear force rule in AutoDefaults.
Shear force calculation

UDL for AutoConnection
Yield stress is defined in the material catalog. Profile dimensions come from the profile catalog. UDL percentage is taken either from the connection dialog box or from an advanced option.
To switch on UDL calculation for AutoConnection: 1. 2. On the Design tab in the connection dialog box, set the field Use UDL to Yes. Enter the UDL percentage in the UDL % field. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a default percentage (set using the advanced option XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT).
UDL for AutoDefaults
To switch on UDL calculation for AutoDefaults:
Set the advanced option XS_AUTOCONNECTION_USE_UDL to TRUE. Use the advanced option XS_AUTODEFAULT_UDL_PERCENT to set the UDL percentage.
147
148
CNC
Introduction
CNC (Computer Numerical Control) refers to the operation of a machine tool via motors, switches, and so on, with a computer controlling the manufacturing process. During the manufacturing process a machine tool or machining center cuts or shapes the piece of material. This chapter describes how to export CNC data from Tekla Structures models for use by machine tools. We explain how to export the data in different formats, such as DSTV, and DXF. We describe how to generate pop-marks in NC files. Pop marks are small holes that help the shop assemble individual parts to form an assembly. Then we explain how to generate hard stamps in NC files. Hard stamps are text marks that can contain various kind of information about parts. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
In this chapter
Contents
NC files (p. 149) DSTV (p. 159) DXF (p. 160) Pop-marks (p. 161) Hard stamps (p. 164)
6.1 NC files
After you finish detailing in Tekla Structures, you can deliver the results to the next phase. You can use CNC links to send the information directly to automatic cutting and welding machines, or produce data for MIS systems (management information systems).
Formats
Tekla Structures produces NC files in the following formats: 1. 2. DSTV DXF
Tekla Structures creates the files from completed regions of the Tekla Structures model. Tekla Structures translates part length, hole positions, bevels, notches, and cuts into sets of coordinates that sawing, drilling and profile burners can use to create the part in the shop.
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 CNC
149
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association. Often NC machines can use these files directly to punch, drill, and cut parts. For other machines you may need to translate DSTV files to suit the specific machine. If you need machine-specific files, you may have to post-process the NC files Tekla Structures produces, using an NC Translator program.
Tekla Structures model NC files NC software NC machine Finished machined part To define NC settings and create NC files, go to File > CNC > NC files...
Topics
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Pop-mark settings (p. 162) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151) Defining hole properties (p. 154) Creating NC files (p. 157) Defining the output format and folder (p. 158)
Setting up NC files
Use the NC file settings dialog box to edit machine-specific settings, such as the file format. This helps you sort NC files into machine-specific folders. You can also specify that different parts be machined by different NC machines, for example, plates by one machine, drilled parts by another, etc.
150
NC file settings Plates Plasma cut Drilled parts To set up NC files: 1. 2. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... Click Add to open the NC file settings dialog box, which contains several tabs:
Tab
Files and part selection
Description Output format, the profile types that machines can handle, and maximum hole diameters Slot conversion options Hard stamp options
More information Defining the output format and folder (p. 158) Defining selection criteria (p. 152) Defining hole properties (p. 154) Hard stamp properties (p. 164)
Holes and cuts Hard stamp
Tekla Structures saves the settings files in the attributes folder under the current model folder.
See also
Pop-mark settings (p. 162) Defining destination machines for parts (p. 151) Creating NC files (p. 157) Fittings affect NC data (p. 159)
Defining destination machines for parts

To define the limits of an NC machine: 1. Open the NC file settings dialog box and go to the Files and Part selection tab.
151
2.
In the Selection criteria for parts section, use the Maximum size and Profile type fields to define the limits of the NC machine, for parts and profile types. Larger parts will be sent to the next machine.
Tekla Structures uses DSTV standard names for profile types: I, U, L, M, R, B, CC, T, SO. See also Profile type (p. 153).
See also
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Defining selection criteria

Each NC file setting is meant for one NC machine. The selection criteria determine the part types and maximum sizes the machine is meant to or able to process. To define the selection criteria: 1. 2. 3. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... The NC Files dialog box appears. Select a setting from the list and click Edit.... If the list is empty, click Add... to create new settings. In the NC file settings dialog box, define the selection criteria.
152
Maximum size
The maximum size options define the maximum length, width, and height of the parts the machine can handle. Larger parts are sent to other machines.
Profile type
The machine can handle all the profile types which have the option Yes in the Profile type list. Profile types are named according to the DSTV (p. 159) standard:
DSTV profile type I U L M R B CC T SO
Description I profiles U and C profiles Angle profiles Rectangular tubes Round bars and tubes Plate profiles CC profiles Tee shaped profiles Z profiles and all the other types of profile
The DTSV standard does not support curved beams, so Tekla Structures does not support them, either.
Round tubes
By default Tekla Structures unwraps round tubes as plate profiles and uses the plate profile type B in the NC file header data. To change this, use the advanced option XS_TUBE_UNWRAP_USE_PLATE_PROFILE_TYPE_IN_NC.
Maximum size of holes

The Maximum size of holes box defines what parts NC files are created for. The NC file is not created if a part contains larger holes or its material is thicker than the values specified in a row in this box. The hole size is connected to material thickness or plate thickness. Each row contains the maximum hole diameter and material thickness. Both conditions have to be met for the NC file to be created. For example, a row with the values 60 45 means that when the material thickness is 45 mm or smaller and the hole diameter is 60 mm or smaller, the NC file is created. You can add as many rows as needed.
Example
The following example shows how the Maximum size of holes can be defined. The NC file settings are defined for the following situation:
Three plates of different thickness Two bolt groups with equal sizes, and one bolt group with a larger size
153
The NC file settings are defined in the Maximum size of holes box in the NC File Settings dialog box as follows: Test1 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
Hole diameter: 22 Thickness of plates: 10
Test2 creates a folder under the model folder for the plates that fit the following criteria:
Hole diameter: 22 Thickness of plates: 20
When you create NC files for the plates, the folder Test1 includes the plate PL350*10 and the folder Test2 includes the plate PL350*20. The plate PL350*15 is not included in any folder, because the the hole size criterium is not met.
The order in which you enter the criteria is important: enter the most exclusive criteria first. If you define the criteria in a different order, also the results will be different.
Defining hole properties

Open the NC File Settings dialog box and go to the Holes and cuts tab. You have the following options:
Inner corner shape
The option Inner corner shape is used to change the shape of inner corners for the NC file. Inner corners are for example web copes or flange cuts at the beam end. The examples in the table below show how the different inner corner shape options affect the part in the NC file. The original part in the model looks like in the picture below, flanges are cut entirely and web is coped.
154
Option 0
Example
Description Radius The inner corners are shaped like holes with given radius. A separate BO-block is not written to the NC file.
Tangential The inner corner is rounded by the value given into the Radius field.
Square The corner is as it is in the model.
Drilled hole A drilled hole is added to the inner corner. Hole radius is the same as the value in the Radius field. Holes are written as a seprate BOblock to the NC file.
Tangential drilled hole A drilled hole is added tangentially to the inner corner. Hole radius is the same as the value in the Radius field. Holes are written as a seprate BOblock to the NC file.
155
The inner corner shape affects also cuts on the flange.
Limitations of the inner corner shape
Inner corner shape is not applied to rectangular openings, which are at the middle of a part, like in the picture below.
Inner corner shape does not apply to those inner contours, which are already rounded in the model. The model values are kept.
CNC flange clearance
The height of the clearance area is defined in the NC File Settings dialog box on the Holes and cuts tab with the field Distance from flange within which web is not cut. If a cut in a part is located closer the flange than the clearance in the model, the cut points inside that clearance are moved to the border of the clearance area when the NC file is written.
Model
NC file This picture shows how the part is modeled. The cut goes closer to the top flange than the defined flange clearance in the NC file settings.
This picture shows how the part is written to the NC files. The dimension shows the clearance. The top of the original cut is moved so that the clearance area is left free. The bottom of the cut is not moved.
The clearance check only affects the following DSTV profile types:
156

Machine slots as:
U C L
These options define slotted holes.

Maximum hole diameter Maximum size of holes
Ignore slots: deletes slotted holes A single hole in the center of the slot: drills a single hole in the center of the slotted hole Four small holes, one at each corner: drills 4 smaller holes, one at each corner Internal contours: flame-cuts the slots as internal contours Slots: leaves slots as they are.
Holes and slotted holes that are larger than the maximum hole diameter are manufactured as internal contours. Use the Maximum size of holes section of the Files and part selection tab to define the maximum hole diameter for different plate thicknesses. Once you have finished defining NC settings, click OK to save your changes and close the NC file settings dialog box.
See also
Creating NC files (p. 157)
Creating NC files
To create NC files: If necessary, define the NC file settings. See Setting up NC files (p. 150). 1. 2. 3. Go to the NC files dialog box, or click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to open it. Select the Create checkboxes in the NC file settings section to indicate which NC file settings to use. Against the Create files for field, select a checkbox to indicate the parts you want to create NC files for: All parts
4.
Selected parts
Click Create to create the NC files.
Tekla Structures does not create NC files for curved beams.
See also
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Defining the output format and folder (p. 158)
Creating tube NC files

To be able to create NC files for tubular hollow sections, you need to first use the specific tube components to create tube-to-tube and tube-to-plate connections. After using the components, you can create an NC file for data export from Tekla Structures to the CNC machine. The tube NC file creation results into an XML file which includes the model data. To create tube NC files:
Usage
1.
Go to File > Export > Create Tube NC files....
157
The HGG Tube NC Files dialog box opens. 2. 3. 4. Set the name for the export file, and browse for the location where you want to save the file. Select whether you want to create the file for selected parts or for all parts. Click Create to create the NC file. Tekla Structures creates an XML file and a log file in the location you have defined.
To get the correct tube NC export results, you must use the specific tube components for creating tube fittings and cuts. Cuts and fittings created manually or by other components will not be exported in the tube NC file creation.
See also
Tube-Chamfer (1) Tube-CrossingSaddle (1) Tube-MitreSaddle+Hole (1) Tube-Saddle+Hole (1) Tube-SlottedHole (1)
Defining the output format and folder

Format
Use the options in NC file settings > Files and part selection, File format field to select the file format. For more information on the DSTV format, see DSTV (p. 159). By default Tekla Structures creates NC files in the current model folder. To change this: 1. 2. 3. Go to the Files and part selection tab. Click the Browse button next to the File location field. In the Set file location dialog box, locate the correct folder. If the folder does not exist, use the Create New Folder button to create it. You must select a file in the destination folder to get the folder selected in the File location field. It does not matter which file you select. If there are no files in the folder, create one there, for example an empty .txt file.
Folder
4.
Relative paths
Click OK. Tekla Structures displays the folder path in the File location field.
You can also enter a folder name or a relative path directly in the File location field. The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the advanced option XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is set to C:\NC.
File location .\ .\MyFiles C:\TEMP
NC files are created to C:\NC C:\NC\ModelName C:\NC\ModelName\MyFiles C:\TEMP
The following table shows where the NC files are created with different values of the File location field, when the advanced option XS_MIS_FILE_DIRECTORY is NOT set.
158
File location .\ .\MyFiles C:\TEMP

See also
NC files are created to model folder model folder model folder\MyFiles C:\TEMP
Setting up NC files (p. 150) Creating NC files (p. 157)
6.2 DSTV
DSTV format is an industrial standard defined by the German Steel Construction Association. The data for NC output comes from the model. We recommend that you complete detailing and create drawings prior to producing NC output. To create DSTV files: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Select the parts from which you want to create NC files. Click File > Export > CNC > Create NC Files... to display the NC files dialog box. Click Add to display the NC file settings dialog box. Go to the File format field on the Files and part selection tab and select DSTV. In the Settings name field, enter a distinctive name for the settings. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box. Go to the NC File settings section of the NC files dialog box and select the DSTV file settings you created. Select the Selected parts checkbox. Click Create.
This will create nc1 files for all selected parts and put them in the model folder. The filename consists of a position number and the extension nc1.
See also
Pop-marks (p. 161) Setting up NC files (p. 150) Defining the output format and folder (p. 158)
Fittings affect NC data

When creating NC files in DSTV format, the method you use to cut the end of the beam affects beam length in the NC file. The illustration below shows the default length when you have fitting and line cuts.
159
Fitting affects the length Line cut does not affect length Line cut Fitting The overall length of a beam will be the fitted net length of the beam. This means that Tekla Structures always takes the fitting into account when calculating beam length. For lines, polygons, or part cuts, the cut does not affect beam length, but the overall length in the NC/ DSTV file will be the gross (initial modeled) length of the beam.
Shortest length
If you want to use the shortest possible length in the NC file, you can change this so that the cut affects part length: 1. 2. Open the Advanced options dialog and enter 1 in the Value field for advanced option XS_DSTV_NET_LENGTH in the CNC category. Restart Tekla Structures.
Net and cross length
If you want to include both net and cross length into NC file header data, set the advanced option XS_DSTV_PRINT_NET_AND_GROSS_LENGTH.
6.3 DXF
This section explains how to create NC data in 2D DXF format.
Preconditions
Before running a DXF conversion, you must first create NC files in DSTV format. For more information, see DSTV (p. 159). You can then use a separate Tekla Structures program, dstv2dxf.exe to convert the files to DXF format. The program converts NC DSTV files to 2D DXF files. Tekla Structures only writes one side of a part (front, top, back or bottom) to file, so this export format is most suited to plates.
Topics
Converting DSTV files to DXF (p. 161)
160
Converting DSTV files to DXF

The most convenient way to convert DSTV files to DXF files is to use the macro Convert_DSTV2DXF, located in Tools > Macros.... You can also use a dstv2dxf converter to convert DSTV files to DXF files. To start the conversion: 1. 2. 3. Save the *.nc1 file(s) in the dstv2dxf folder. Double-click the suitable dstv2dxf conversion .bat file (for example tekla_dstv2dxf_metric_conversion.bat) in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\dstv2dxf folder. The converter converts the files to dxf format in the same folder.
If you need to adjust the conversion settings, edit the settings in the file dstv2dxf.def and restart the conversion. For more information on settings, see the document DEF File Description.pdf in the same folder.
6.4
Pop-marks
Tekla Structures can generate pop-marks in NC files to help position parts that will be manually welded to the main part. Pop-marks are usually made using a drilling machine. To include pop-marks in the NC file, you have to define a list of part names to pop-mark in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. To access the dialog box, select File > Export > CNC > Create
NC Files... > Pop-marks...
You can save the pop-mark settings in a .ncp file, which Tekla Structures saves in the attributes folder under the current model folder by default. Tekla Structures only creates pop-marks for parts for which you have defined properties. The Pop-marking options tab in the Pop-mark settings dialog box contains options for controlling the settings for marks in the back of parts, and other additional options. For more information on these settings, see Pop-marking options (p. 163). To have Tekla Structures create pop-marks when creating NC files, select the check box in NC files > NC file settings: > Pop-marks.
Pop-marking also affects numbering. For example, if two parts have different pop-marks, or one part has popmarks and the other one does not, Tekla Structures gives the parts different numbers. See What affects numbering.
Creating pop-marks
To create pop-marks in an NC file: 1. 2. 3. Define and save the pop-mark settings in the Pop-mark settings (p. 162) dialog box. To display pop-marks in a model view, select Pop-marking options > Show pop-marks in the model. Create the NC files. Remember to select the Pop-marks checkbox in the NC files dialog box.
161
Pop-marks are written in the NC file BO block as 0 mm diameter holes. Tekla Structures displays thick red lines for each pop-mark pair in the model view which was last updated.
Topics
Pop-mark settings (p. 162) Pop-marking options (p. 163)
Pop-mark settings
The Pop-mark settings dialog box includes pop-mark settings that define:
Which parts are pop-marked Where the pop-marks are created
Tekla Structures saves the settings file .ncp in the attributes folder under the current model folder. Tekla Structures looks for this file in the current model folder, then uses the standard folder search order. See Folder search order (p. 70). You can use wildcards (* ? [ ] ) in the Main part name and Secondary part name fields in the Pop-mark settings dialog box. For example, HE* matches all parts with a profile name that begins with the characters "HE". For more information on wildcards, see Wildcards.
The order of the lines in the dialog box is important. Tekla Structures uses the match it finds, so you should put the most limiting definition first, and the most generic one last.
Pop-mark settings
Option
Main part profile type Main part name
Description The main part profile types to pop-mark. The list box contains profile types corresponding to the DSTV standard. The main part profile names to pop-mark. You can enter several part names separated by commas. Secondary part profile type.
Sec part profile type
162
Option
Secondary part name Pop-mark location
Description Secondary part name. You can enter several part names separated by commas. Defines how the secondary part is projected onto a main part.
Left side: The left side of the secondary part

Edge distance
is marked on the main part. The left side is the side of the secondary part that points in the negative direction of the main part local coordinate system. Right side: The right side of the secondary part is marked on the main part. Both sides: combines Left side and Right side. Center: Center of the secondary part.
Left side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the left side of the secondary. Right side holes: Marks the main part with the hole positions on the right side of the secondary. Both side holes: combines Left side holes and Right side holes. Middle line: Marks two points on the middle line of the secondary part x axis.
Minimum distance from a pop-mark to the edge of the main part. Tekla Structures does not create pop-marks inside this distance. If a pop-mark is inside the defined edge distance, Tekla Structures moves it (with the exception of Center). Moves pop-marks to the main part flange. Creates pop-marks into secondary parts.
Move to flange Secondary popmarks
Pop-marking options
Options for marks in the back
Use the options for marks in the back face of parts to set the NC machine to:
Rotate the part if there are items on the back of it and none on the front. Drill the pop-marks through to the back, if there are no other items there. The hole diameter must also be defined. Rotate the part and drill pop-marks through to the back if there are no items on the front but some in the back or more pop-marks on the back than on the front. The hole diameter must also be defined.
No pop-marks on overlapping holes deletes a pop-mark if a hole overlaps it. Pop-mark centres of studs adds pop-marks to the center point of studs. Uncheck this
Other options
option to prevent studs from being pop-marked.

Show pop-marks in the model displays pop-marks in model views.
Examples
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to mark the center point of all round secondary profiles on a main part, and not to create pop-marks closer than 10 mm to the main part edge.
163
The following line in the Pop-mark settings dialog box tells Tekla Structures to project the hole locations in secondary plates onto a main part:
6.5 Hard stamps

Tekla Structures can output DSTV files that include hard stamps for the workshop to apply to main and secondary parts. Hard stamps are text marks that contain information about parts and assemblies, for example, project and lot number, phase, or part and assembly position.
Creating hard stamps

To include hard stamps in a DSTV file: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Example
In the NC file settings dialog box, go to the Hard stamps tab. Select the checkbox Create hard stamp. In the Available elements list, select the elements to include in the hard stamp. Click OK to save your settings and close the NC file settings dialog box.
This example shows a hard stamp that contains the elements Phase, Part position, Material, and Text.
See also
For more information on hard stamp settings, see Hard stamp properties (p. 164), XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP and XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK.
Hard stamp properties

Use the options on the Hard stamp tab to define the properties of hard stamps on main and/or secondary parts, including:
Information contained in hard stamps (p. 165) The order in which the different elements appear Text height and case Position of hard stamps (p. 165) Hard stamps for secondary parts (p. 165)
164
Information contained in hard stamps

You can include the following information in hard stamps:
Element Project number Lot number Phase Part position Assembly position Material Finish User-defined attribute Text
Description Adds the project number to the hard stamp. Adds the lot number to the hard stamp. Adds the phase number to the hard stamp. Prefix and position number of the part Prefix and position number of the assembly The material of the part. The type of finish. Adds a user-defined attribute (user fields 1-4) to the mark. Opens a dialog box where you can add userdefined text to the hard stamp.
If you include part position and/or assembly position in the hard stamp, they affect the DSTV filename as follows:
Part position: P1.nc1, P2.nc1 Assembly position: A1.nc1, A2.nc1 Assembly and part position: A1-P1.nc1, A2-P2.nc1
Position of hard stamps

Use the options in the Position along the part and Position in depth of part list boxes to define the position of hard stamps on parts. These options move the hard stamp on the same face it is created, but they cannot move the stamp to a different face. If the face is for example bottom flange, you can move the stamp to a different place on bottom flange, but not for example to top flange. Default faces are:
I profile: Bottom flange (u) C- and U-profiles: Back side of web (h) L- profiles: Back (h) or Bottom (u) Rectangular tubes: Bottom flange (u) Round bars: Bottom flange (u) Circular tubes: Front (v) T profiles: Back side of web (h) Plates: Front (v)
If you set the advanced option XS_HARD_STAMP_BY_ORIENTATION_MARK to any value, the default face is changed from bottom (u) to top (o) for L-profiles, rectangular tubes and round bars.
Hard stamps for secondary parts

To create hardstamps also for secondary parts, set XS_SECONDARY_PART_HARDSTAMP to TRUE in Tools > Advanced options > CNC.
165
166
Import and export
Introduction
Tekla Structures includes several tools you can use to import and export models and the information they contain. You can:

In this chapter
Import data from other software and use it to create models and reports. Export data from Tekla Structures to use in manufacturing information systems and structural analysis programs.
This chapter explains how to import and export data in Tekla Structures, and describes the formats and tools available. The first section covers the basics of import and export. The final two sections give more details about the import and export options. You should have some experience of modeling in Tekla Structures. This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Assumed background Contents
Import and export basics (p. 167) Conversion files (p. 175) Importing models (p. 178) Exporting files (p. 201) Tekla WebViewer (p. 250)
7.1 Import and export basics

This section gives you an overview of importing and exporting data in Tekla Structures, as well as step-by-step instructions. It includes the different import and export formats available in Tekla Structures. It also describes the conversion files you can use to import profiles and materials.
Topics
Using import and export (p. 168) Available formats (p. 168) Re-importing a model (p. 180) Revision control options (p. 181) Creating reports of import (p. 182)
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Import and export
167
Using import and export

You can use import and export in Tekla Structures for several purposes:
Import 2D or 3D models created by other software, then detail them using Tekla Structures. Once detailing is complete, export the model and return it to the architect or engineer for review. Export Tekla Structures models to use in analysis and design (several formats). Then import the design and analysis results back to the Tekla Structures model. Export data for use in the fabrication phase:
You can export CNC data (Computer Numerical Control) for use by automated cutting, boring and welding machinery, MIS (Manufacturing Information Systems) so that fabricators can track project progress.
Available formats
The following tables list many of the different software and formats you can use in Tekla Structures to import and export data. Locate the software in the first column (Software). Read across the columns to locate import and export tools (for example, DWG/DXF, FEM). Each cell displays the import and export formats (for example, Calma, XML, SDNF). You may also be able to exchange data with software not listed here.
Importing into Tekla Structures (p. 168) Exporting from Tekla Structures (p. 172)
Importing into Tekla Structures
Import tool > Software 3D+ Advance Steel Allplan ArchiCAD
DWG/ DXF 2D, 3D
FEM
CIMsteel CIS/2 LPM5
CAD SDNF SDNF
Other
2D, 3D 2D, 3D
IFC 2X3, DGN IFC 2X3, fcXML 2X3
ArchonCAD AutoCAD Architecture AutoCAD Civil 3D Autodesk 3ds Max Autodesk 3ds MAXDesign/ VIZ
2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DGN
168
Import tool > Software Autodesk Inventor
DWG/ DXF
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD
Other STEP, IGES (as Reference models) (1)
Autodesk Maya AutoDesk Mechanical AutoPLANT Bentley Architecture Bentley Building Electrical Systems Bentley Building MechanicalSy stems Bentley Structural Bocad
DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D IFC 2X3, STEP (1), DGN IFC 2X3, STEP (1), DGN IFC 2X3, STEP (1), DGN CIS/2 LPM6 d SDNF IFC 2X3, STEP (1), DGN IFC 2X2, 2X3 (as Reference models)
2D, 3D
2D, 3D
2D, 3D
SDNF
Building Systems, AutoCADME P BUS CADDUCT Cadmatic CADPipe CADWorx Plant Calma Catia
2D, 3D
BUS 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D Calma 2D, 3D SDNF STEP, IGES (as Reference models) (1) IFC 2X3, IfcXML 2X3, DGN SDNF
Constructor
2D, 3D
Daystar Software
DXF
169
Import tool > Software Digital Project elcoCAD ESA Prima WIN ETABS
DWG/ DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD SDNF
Other STEP (1)
DSTV CIS/2 SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) FabTrol XML, SteelFab
FabPro Pipe FabTrol
2D, 3D CIS/2
FactoryCAD Floor Pro FormZ FrameWorks
2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D SDNF STEP (1) DGN (as Reference models) MicasPlus STEP (1) IFC2X2, IFC2X3 (as Reference models) 2D, 3D 2D, 3D MicasPlus DGN (as Reference models), IFC 2X3, STEP (1) 2D, 3D STAAD DXF DXF SDNF DGN, STEP (1) DGN (as Reference models) DGN (as Reference models) SDNF STEP (1)
GT Strudl IronCAD IFC schema edition
DXF 2D, 3D
CIS/2
KeyCreator Maxon Cinema 4D MicasPlus MicroStation
ModelDraft Multiframe Nastran NX (Unigraph) PDMS
PDS
170
Import tool > Software PipeCAD PipeDesigner 3D Plantview PowerFrame Pro/Engineer ProSteel 3D RAMSteel Revit Architecture Revit Structure Revit System, MEP Rhinoceros Risa-3D (Suite) ROBOT RSTAB SACS SAFE SAP
DWG/ DXF DXF 2D, 3D
FEM
CIMsteel
CAD
Other
Plantview DSTV STEP (1) SDNF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DXF DSTV 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DSTV SACS CIS/2 CIS/2 SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) SDNF SDNF CIS/2 DGN (as Reference models) STEP, IGES (as Reference models) (1), DGN STEP, IGES (as Reference models) (1) STEP (1) SDNF DGN SDNF CIS/2 CIS/2 STP SDNF CIS/2 IFC 2X3, DGN IFC 2X3, DGN IFC 2X3, DGN DGN, STEP (1)
SDS/2 SESAM S-frame Sketchup SmartPlant
2D, 3D SACS 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D S-frame
CIS/2
Solid Edge
DXF
SolidWorks
2D, 3D
SpaceClaim SPACE GASS
2D, 3D
171
Import tool > Software Speedikon STAAD Steel Smart System Stan 3d StruCad Structural for MicroStation TriForma StructureWor ks TriForma Trimble LM TurboCAD Volo View
DWG/ DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D
FEM STAAD
CIMsteel
CAD HLI
Other
Stan 3d 2D, 3D CIS/2 SDNF DGN (as Reference models) 2D, 3D CIS/2 DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DGN, STEP (1) STEP(1)
(1) Support for STEP and IGES formats is currently limited.
Exporting from Tekla Structures

Export tool > Software 3D+ Advance Steel Allplan ArchiCAD ArchonCAD AutoCAD Architecture AutoCAD Civil 3D Autodesk 3ds Max Autodesk 3ds MAXDesign/VIZ Autodesk Inventor Autodesk Maya AutoDesk Mechanical AutoPLANT AutoVue 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D (2) 2D, 3D (2) 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D IFC 2X3, STEP (1, 3) STEP, IGES (1, 3) DWG/DXF 2D, 3D CIS/2 SDNF IFC 2X3 IFC 2X3, IfcXML 2X3 FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
172
Export tool > Software Bentley Architecture Bentley Building ElectricalSystems Bentley Structural Bocad Building Systems, AutoCADMEP Cadmatic CADDUCT CADPipe CADWorx Plant Calma Catia Constructor Daystar Software Digital Project DuctDesigner 3D EJE elcoCAD EPC ETABS FEM 2D, 3D CIS/2 SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) 2D, 3D MIS STEP (1, 3) 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D MIS SDNF SDNF STEP (1, 3) 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D Calma SDNF STEP, IGES (1, 3) IFC 2X3, IfcXML 2X3 3D 2D, 3D XML SDNF DWG/DXF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other IFC 2X3, STEP (1, 3) IFC 2X3, STEP (1, 3) IFC 2X3, STEP (1, 3) IFC 2X3
ESA Prima WIN Eureka LPM FabPro Pipe Fabtrol 2D, 3D
DSTV CIS1 & 2 CIS/2 (Manufacturing ) 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D CIS1 & 2 DXF 2D, 3D IFC2X, IFC2X2, IFC2X3 2D, 3D 2D, 3D STEP (1, 3) STEP (1, 3) STAAD SDNF, PML STEP (1, 3) 3D DGN MIS
FactoryCAD Floor Pro FormZ FrameWorks GT Strudl HOOPS IFC schema edition
IronCAD KeyCreator
173
Export tool > Software Maxon Cinema 4D MicroSAS MicroStation DWG/DXF 2D, 3D MicroSAS 3D DGN, IFC 2X3, STEP (1, 3) PML 2D, 3D STAAD 2D, 3D 2D, 3D SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles with end codes) DXF DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D Plantview DSTV STEP (1, 3) 2D, 3D CIS/2 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DXF DSTV 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D DSTV CIS/2 CIS/2 SDNF PDMS (only straight profiles) SCIA CIS/2 CIS/2 CIS/2 IFC 2X3 IFC 2X3 IFC 2X3 STEP (1, 3) SDNF SDNF STEP (1, 3) STEP (1, 3) DGN SDNF FEM CIMsteel CAD Other
ModelDraft Multiframe Nastran NavisWorks NX (Unigraph) PDS
PDMS PipeCAD PipeDesigner 3D Plant-4D Plantview PowerFrame Pro/Engineer ProSteel 3D RAM Revit Architecture Revit Structure Revit System, MEP Rhinoceros Risa-3D (Suite) Robobat ROBOT RSTAB SAFE SAP
SCIA SDS/2 S-Frame Sketchup SmartPlant Solibri Model Checker
2D, 3D 2D, 3D DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D CIS/2
DGN IFC 2X3
174
Export tool > Software Solid Edge SolidWorks SpaceClaim SPACE GASS Speedikon STAAD Steel 2000 Steel Smart System Steelcad StruCad Structural for MicroStation TriForma StructureWorks TriForma Trimble LM TurboCAD VectorWorks Volo View DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D (1) To export in STEP or IGES format, you need to use the STEP IGES converter available in the Extranet: https://extranet.tekla.com/BC/tekla-structures-en/product/extended-applications/ Downloads/TeklaStructures_Converter_2_0_setup.zip (2) Exporting drawings into dwg format is supported up to AutoCAD version 2007. (3) Support for STEP and IGES formats is currently limited. STEP (1, 3) CIS/2 2D, 3D 2D, 3D 2D, 3D CIS/2 SDNF SDNF 3D DGN 2D, 3D STAAD CIS/2 MIS DWG/DXF DXF 2D, 3D 2D, 3D SDNF HLI FEM CIMsteel CAD Other STEP, IGES (1, 3) STEP, IGES (1, 3) STEP(1, 3)
STEP (1, 3)
7.2 Conversion files

About conversion files
Conversion files map Tekla Structures profile and material names with names used in other software. Conversion files are simple text files, containing the Tekla Structures name in the first column, and the name used in the other software package in the second column. Columns are separated by a space. All parametric profiles must be entered in the profile conversion file. You can use the same conversion file both when importing and exporting models. You can specify the location of conversion files in most of the import and export tools.
175
If you leave the field blank, Tekla Structures looks for the conversion file defined by the advanced option XS_PROFDB, in Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > File Locations. If you enter a conversion file name without a path, Tekla Structures searches for the file in the current model folder.
Tekla Structures includes several conversion files in the standard installation, and you can also create your own. See Creating conversion files (p. 177). Conversion files are located in the \environments\environment\profil folder. All conversion files have the extension cnv.
Converting twin profiles

Tekla Structures also includes twin profile conversion files. Tekla Structures reads the twin profile conversion file before the profile conversion file, so you should include the profiles from the original model in the import. The twin profile conversion file is a text file containing the profile prefix (characters only) and the distance between the profiles in mm, separated by a space character. Tekla Structures converts all profiles with the specified prefix to twin profiles.
Example
The twin profile conversion file could for example be named to twin_profiles.cnv and it could contain lines like the one below:
DL 20
Spacing
The distance between the profiles is the same for all the profiles with the same profile prefix. So for example the profiles with prefix DL will always have the same spacing. If you want different spacing values, then you need to use different profile prefix, too. You also need to add the twin profile to the profile conversion file to get DL profile converted to L-profile in Tekla Structures:
L200*20 DL200/20-20
Also add to profile conversion
Limitations
Twin profile conversion cannot be used for profiles which start with a number. This means that you cannot define double angles as 2L. Instead, you need to use for example DL as the prefix for twin profile: DL200/20-20. Twin profile conversion works only in CAD import, but not in FEM import.
Additional information
Creating conversion files (p. 177) Locating conversion files (p. 177) Sample conversion files (p. 177) Troubleshooting (p. 178) Importing models (p. 178)
176
Creating conversion files

You can also create your own conversion files. To create a new conversion file: 1. 2. 3. Open an existing conversion file using any text editor (e.g. Wordpad). See Locating conversion files (p. 177). Use Save as to give the file a new name. Edit the file, entering profile names recognized by Tekla Structures in the first column, and the corresponding name recognized by the other software in the second column. See Sample conversion files (p. 177).
Locating conversion files

Standard conversion files are located in the profil folder for the environment you are using (for example, \environments\usimp\profil). Tekla Structures searches for profile conversion files:
In the current model folder Using the path indicated by the advanced option XS_PROFDB in Tools > Options >
Advanced Options... > File Locations.
Sample conversion files

Here are some sample conversion files for reference:
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> SDNF ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-nameConverted-name C10X15.3C10X15.3 C10X20C10X20 C10X25C10X25 C10X30C10X30 C12X20.7C12X20.7 C12X25C12X25 C12X30C12X30 C15X33.9C15X33.9 C15X40C15X40 C15X50C15X50 C3X4.1 C3X4.1
177
! Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> DSTV ! ! If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same ! as Tekla Structures-name. ! Tekla Structures-name Converted-name C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25 C10X15.3 C10X20 C10X25 C10X30 C12X20.7 C12X25
Troubleshooting
If you have problems importing a model, check the following:

Examples
Are there any error messages in the Tekla Structures log file? Is the input file located in the current model folder? Are there are blank material definitions (" ", empty quotation marks) in your input file? In your input file, see if profile position strings contain a space character (e.g. "Hand Rail" or "Thread 13").
Errors and corrections are highlighted in the following examples. Incorrect input file
00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread 4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Correct input file

00100782 4 0 2 "brace" "Tread_4" 1 "TREAD4.5" "A36" 0.000000 0 0 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 16.250000 13.154267 3.857143 15.500000 13.154267 3.857143 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7.3 Importing models

This section explains the basics of how to import a model created by a different system into Tekla Structures. It also contains details of the specific information you need to include for each type of import file.
Topics
Import tools (p. 179) Overview of importing models (p. 179)
178
Re-importing a model (p. 180) Creating reports of import (p. 182)
Import tools
Use the following tools to import different file types into Tekla Structures:
Importing DWG/DXF files (p. 182) IFC import (p. 182) FEM import (p. 187) CAD import (p. 186) CIS import (p. 185) (CIMsteel) Steelfab import (p. 198) Fabtrol XML import (p. 198) S-Frame import (p. 199) MicasPlus import (p. 199) Eureka LPM import (p. 199) Model dump import (p. 191) ASCII import (p. 191) ASCII format description (p. 192) Attribute import (p. 194)
Overview of importing models

These steps explain the basics of how to import a model into Tekla Structures. You will also need to refer to other sections for information specific to a particular import type. See also Import tools (p. 179). To import a model: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Click File > Import. Select any of the following options FEM, CIMSteel, CAD, or Other, to open the New import model dialog box. Select the import type in the Type list box. See also Re-importing a model (p. 180). Enter a name for the import model in the Name field. The default name is import model. Tekla Structures uses the model name for revision control. For more information, see Revision control options (p. 181). Click Properties... to open a dialog box where you can define the settings for the import file type you selected. On the Parameters tab, enter a file name in the Input file field, or use the browse (...) button to set the path to the file. Enter values in the Origin fields if you want to import the file to a specific origin. Click OK to return to the New import model dialog box.
Finishing the import

To complete the import: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click OK to open the Import models dialog box. Select the model to import. Click Import. Tekla Structures displays the Import model info dialog box. Select which version of parts to import.
179
5. 6. 7.
Click Accept all. Tekla Structures prompts Do you want to save the import model for subsequent imports? Click Yes. Tekla Structures displays the import model in a model view.
Re-importing a model
If you need to re-import a model: Follow steps 1 to 4 in Overview of importing models (p. 179), but enter a new name in the Name field. If you use the same name as in the original import, Tekla Structures generates the warning Illegal name for import model. Tekla Structures uses this name to track revisions in the model. See also Revision control options (p. 181).
180
Revision control options

You have the following options to specify the actions Tekla Structures takes when importing changed objects:
181
The left-hand column, Previous plan, lists the state of objects in your model, compared with the state of objects in the file to be imported. They can be New, Modified, Deleted, or Same. Tekla Structures compares the state of objects being imported with those in your model. They can be Not in model, Different, or Same. Use the list boxes in the rows under Not in model, Different, or Same to specify the actions to take when importing changed objects. The options are No action, Copy, Modify, or Delete.
You can only use Delete to delete objects that have been deleted from your model, not the imported model.
Creating reports of import

Some of the import tools give you the option to create a report of the import. By default, Tekla Structures does not create reports when you import files. You specify the following information using the Report tab:
Field
Create report Display report Report template Report file name
Description Select Yes to create a report of the imported model objects. Select Yes to display the report file in the List dialog box. Enter the path of the report template, or use the browse (...) button to locate it. Enter the path for the report file, or use the browse (...) button to locate it.
Importing DWG/DXF files

The DWG/DXF import tools import 3D or 2D models, in DXF or DWG. You can import the file as parts and plates, or reference lines. To import DWG/DXF files, click File > Import > DWG/DXF.... You will need to include the following additional information about the import file:
Create:
Reference lines displays parts in the model using their reference lines in the original model. Parts displays the full profile of parts in the original model, based on the profile sizes in the Beam profile and Plate profile fields. You can only use metric profiles with this option.
Check Use 2D import to import a two dimensional representation of the original model. This is useful when you use the reference line option. Leave Use 2D import blank to import the model in 3D.
IFC import
You can import IFC physical models as reference models to Tekla Structures, for example, from architects and mechanical designers. The IFC import functionality in Tekla Structures supports all the sub-objects of the IfcBuildingElement class and sub-objects of the IfcProduct class including:
182

Supported schemas
Architectural entities Structural entities Building services entities Electrical entities
Tekla Structures supports the following IFC schemas:
IFC2X2 IFC2X3 (recommended)
Both STEP IFC (.ifc) and ifcXML (.ifcXML) formats are supported. You can use compressed (.ifcZIP) or uncompressed import files.
See also
Importing an IFC model (p. 183)
Importing an IFC model

To import an IFC model into Tekla Structures, use the File > Insert Reference Model... command.
See also
Inserting a reference model
Converting IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects

You can convert linear IFC objects such as beams, columns, braces and walls into native Tekla Structures objects. Before you start, ensure that you have split the IFC model you are using as a reference model into reference model objects. To convert IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects: 1. 2. Click Tools > Macros... Select IFCObjectConverter from the list of available macros and click Run. If your environment does not contain this macro, you can start it by double-clicking the file ObjectConverter.exe in the folder ..\Program Files\TeklaStructures\<version>\nt\bin\applicati ons\tekla\Model\ObjectConverter. 3. Select the IFC objects you want to convert.
Ensure that the Select objects in components when selecting the objects.
switch is active
4.
In the Convert IFC objects dialog box, select the type of objects you are converting: Select Beams and Columns if you are converting beams, columns or braces.
Select Walls if you are converting walls.
5. Click Convert. Tekla Structures creates native Tekla Structures objects. The original IFC reference model objects are also kept as such.
Limitations
Tekla Structures is dependent on the quality of the IFC model, because it uses information available in the model when converting the objects. For this reason objects might not always be converted correctly. We recommend that you always check the results of the conversion.
183
See also
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects Creating reports of converted IFC objects (p. 184) Checking profile and material of converted objects (p. 184) Displaying catalog and mapping files of converted objects (p. 184)
Creating reports of converted IFC objects

You can create reports of the IFC objects that have been converted into native Tekla Structures objects. Before you start, ensure that you have converted the IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects. To create a report of the converted IFC objects: 1.
Limitations
Click Report in the Convert IFC objects dialog box.
Sometimes the input data in the IFC model is not adequate to successfully create the converted object. The status of the converted object is reported in the Info box in the report with the Class value.
Class value
997 998
Description The converted object was created successfully. The rotation of the profile of the converted object may be incorrect due to the lack of parametrized profile data in the IFC model. The profile name is set to UNKNOWN, because it has not been found from the IFC model.
999
Checking profile and material of converted objects

After you have converted IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects, you can check their profile and material to ensure the conversion was successful. Before you start, ensure that you have converted the IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects. To check the profile and material of converted objects: 1. Click Check in the Convert IFC objects dialog box. If there are any missing profiles or materials, Tekla Structures displays them on the Missing Profiles and Missing Materials tabs in the Missing Mapping dialog box. Select an appropriate option in the Tekla Structures profile and Tekla Structures material lists to define a mapping for the missing profiles or materials. Click Update Mapping Catalogs and Close.
2. 3.
Displaying catalog and mapping files of converted objects

You can display the catalog and mapping files of converted objects in .txt format. When you do this, you can also modify the .txt files and for example add more profiles in the catalogs manually, if needed. Before you start, ensure that you have converted the IFC objects into native Tekla Structures objects. To display the catalog and mapping files of converted objects: 1. Click Catalogs in the Convert IFC objects dialog box.
184
When you do this, Tekla Structures opens the profile and material catalogs and mapping files for profiles and catalogs in .txt format. When you have used this command, the files are available in the attributes subfolder of the model folder.
CIS import
See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select CIS Analyse model import from the Type list box. Use the following fields on the Parameters tab to specify CIS information when importing files:
Field
Model type CIS version
Description Analysis or Design model. Use to select the CIS version:
CIS/1 imports files compatible with the
CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration. CIS/2 imports files compatible with the CIMsteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
Combine members
Defines whether or not the elements of a single part in the CIS file are combined to form another part in Tekla Structures. For example, if a beam in a CIS file is divided into more than one element, and you select Yes, the elements are combined to form one beam in the model. Using No means every element of the beam in the CIS file forms a single beam in the model. Only applied if you select Yes in the Combine members list box. Defines the maximum length for combining the elements in the CIS file. Elements are combined into one part only if their combined length is less than this value. CIS/1 and CIS/2 analysis models can include member offsets (nodes are not exactly at the beams end points). With the default Yes, Tekla Structures uses these offsets to locate the physical members. With No, Tekla Structures determines the location using the node locations. Use to define how forces are imported. With No , Tekla Structures imports absolute values of maximum forces to parts user-defined attributes Shear, Tension and Moment. With Yes, Tekla Structures does not import forces.
Max length for combining
Ignore offset
Ignore forces
ETABS
To import from or export to ETABS software, you need to add two lines to the material conversion file for each Tekla Structures material grade. The first line is for exports, the second for imports. This example shows the lines needed for Tekla Structures material grade A36.
A36 S\MAT\ASTM\GRADE36\ASTM_A36\1994 A36 steel_yield_strength_36.00
185
CAD import
The CAD import tool supports several different formats to import models. See CAD import file types (p. 186). Tekla Structures imports a maximum of 10,000 parts using this option. If the number of parts exceeds this, Tekla Structures displays a warning and does not import the model. In addition to following the steps in Overview of importing models (p. 179), you will need to include the following information about the import file:
CAD specific information (p. 186) Creating log files (p. 186)
CAD specific information

Use the Plantview tab to select a material grade.
Creating log files

In CAD import, the SDNF tab gives you the option to create a log file. If the import fails, examine the log file to find out why. The options in the Create log file list box are:
Create writes a new log file, and deletes the previous log file, each time you import the
model.
Append (default) adds the log information at the end of the existing log file.
You can also decide how the log file is displayed: With an external viewer (e.g. Notepad). Not viewed. In a dialog box. (This creates a separate list dialog box in which the file can only be viewed.)
CAD import file types

You can import the following file types into Tekla Structures, using the CAD import tool.
Option
SDNF
Imports from Several different CAD systems. See SDNF specific options (p. 186). Calma plant design system IEZ AG Speedikon software Plantview design system Cadcentre 3D plant design software
Steel Detailing Neutral File

Calma HLI
High Level Interface

Plantview SDNF (PDMS)
Plant Design Management System

XML
ArchiCAD modeling system
SDNF specific options

The SDNF tab contains the following options for SDNF imports:
186
Field
Part Pos_No Apply cuts and fittings Consider offsets SDNF log files
Description Enter a prefix and a start position number. Relates to Position number type below.
Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the import.
Use No (default) to position part creation points at part end points; Yes creates offsets. Creates the log file SDNF_import.log in the current model folder. See also Creating log files (p. 186). The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a parts user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:
Position number type
Part position
The identifier becomes the parts position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 75).
If you want to import information, which Tekla Structures parts do not have, you can use the SDNF extension line in the SDNF file to be imported, and the REVISION_NUMBER user-defined attribute in Tekla Structures.
FEM import
The FEM (Finite Element Method) import tool supports several formats and provides several options for importing models. See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select FEM Import from the Type list box.
FEM specific information

The FEM import formats are listed in the table below. You will need to include the following information for FEM imports:
Use Part to enter the part position and start number for the model import. Use Assembly to enter the assembly position and start number for the model import.
187
To combine several elements in the FEM model into one part in Tekla Structures, set Combine members to Yes. For example, if a beam in an FEM model consists of more than one element, Tekla Structures combines the elements to form one beam in the Tekla Structures model. With the option NoTekla Structures creates a beam for each element in the FEM model. Use Maximum length to define the maximum length for combining parts. Tekla Structures combines elements into one part only if their combined length is less than the value you enter here.
FEM import file types

Use the following table to select the type of file to import:
File type
DSTV
Use to import models created in DSTV format
More information DSTV files (p. 188) Yield stress in FEM import (p. 191)
(Deutsche StahlbauVerband)
SACS S-Frame Monorail Staad
SACS modeling and analysis software. S-Frame modeling and analysis software. Monorail system STAAD modeling and analysis system Stan 3d analysis software BUS 2.5 analysis software
Yield stress in FEM import (p. 191) S-Frame import (p. 199) STAAD files (p. 189)
(Structural Analysis And Design)

Stan 3d Bus
Stan 3d files (p. 190) Bus import (p. 191)
Only the options relevant to the selected type have any effect on the imported model.
DSTV files
This FEM import tool imports models in the DSTV format. See basic information on FEM import (p. 187). Fill in the following information if you have selected the DSTV import type on the Parameters tab:
On the DSTV tab, select the DSTV version to import. If the DSTV file to be imported contains a static and/or a CAD model, you can choose which one to import: Answering Yes to Import static elements imports the static model. Answering Yes to Import other elements imports the CAD model. For more information, see Model dump import (p. 191).
188
About DSTV
There are three different sub-model types in DSTV:
Static models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and static data (model, restraints, results). CAD models contain general data (profiles, materials, grid lines) and CAD data (elements, eccentricity). NC3D model contains general data (profiles, materials, grid lines), CAD data (elements, eccentricity), and construction data (holes, chamfers).
Sub-models contain four different data levels:
Static data General data CAD data Construction data NC 3D model CAD model Static model Different programs produce different DSTV files. For example, the DSTV file produced by RSTAB static software only contains a static model. Tekla Structures exports either the static model (CROSS_SECTION), or the CAD model (MEMBER_LOCATION).
STAAD files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the STAAD modeling and analysis system. See basic information on FEM import (p. 187). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Staad import type on the Parameters tab:
On the Staad tab, enter a material grade, or use the browse (...) button to locate a grade. ST (single section from the standard built-in tables) ST PIPE (parametric) ST TUBE (parametric) RA (single angle with reverse Y_Z axes)
Tekla Structures supports the following STAAD table type specifications:
189
D (double channel) LD (long leg, double angle) SD (short leg, double angle) TC (beams with top cover plates) BC (beams with bottom cover plate) TB (beams with top and bottom cover plates)
You can import the types CM and T, user-provided steel table types (UPT), and other nonstandard profiles, if you have defined them in the profile conversion file. You must use the underline character in the STAAD name (e.g. UPT_1_W10X49). Tekla Structures automatically converts twin profiles in this import routine.
To make a STAAD input file compatible with the Tekla Structures STAAD import, in STAAD, use the option to save the input file using the option Joint coordinate format (Single). This creates a line for each coordinate in the input file.
Stan 3d files
This FEM import tool imports steel structures from the Stan 3d analysis software. See basic information on FEM import (p. 187). Fill in the following information if you have selected the Stan 3d import type on the Parameters tab:
Before importing Stan 3d models, set the work plane orientation to global in Tekla Structures. Define the profile conversion file (prfexp_stan_3d.cnv) in the Conversion tab. You have two options for mapping profile information: Map section data (for example C1, FG, G1) to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file. Add full profile information in the comment field in the Stan 3d model. Then map the comment to Tekla Structures profiles in the conversion file.
Tekla Structures looks at the comment field first. If it is empty or missing, Tekla Structures uses the section data.
On the Parts tab, enter the part position and start number for the model import. On the Stan 3d tab, enter the material for all imported members in the Material field. Specify the scale of the import model. You can import Stan 3d without specifying the scale, as long as both the Tekla Structures model and the import are in millimeters. If the Stan 3d file is in millimeters, use a scale of 1. If the Stan 3d file is in meters, use a scale of 1000. The default mapping for imports is:
Stan 3ds Member Type to Tekla Structuress Class. Stan 3ds Section Name to Tekla Structuress user-defined attribute Prelim mark.
Tekla Structures displays the number of parts not imported due to missing conversion information in the application window.
190
Bus import
This FEM import tool imports basic steel structures from the BUS 2.5 analysis software input file. See basic information on FEM import (p. 187). On the Parameters tab, select the Bus import type, and then fill in the following information:
On the Conversion tab, enter the name of the profile and material conversion files (prf_expbus.cnv and mat_expbus.cnv) , or use the browse (...) button to locate them. On the Parameters tab, enter the name of the input file (or use the browse (...) button to locate it), and the X, Y, and Z values. On the Bus tab, enter the position number, material, name, and class of the parts to import. Use Beams behind plane to indicate the position of girders and cantilevers. The option Yes aligns the tops of all beams at the floor level.
Yield stress in FEM import

The Default yield stress limit field is used for SACS import file. The Default material when yield stress < limit field is used for SACS import file. Define the material to use if yield stress is less than the limit.
Use the Default material when yield stress >= limit for SACS or DSTV import files. For SACS, this field defines the material to use if yield stress is greater than, or equal to, the limit. For DSTV you can enter the material grade here, if it is not contained in the import file.
Model dump import

The import model dump tool reads an ASCII file of a model dump to create a new model in Tekla Structures, including any views and drawings.
When to use
If you have fatal problems with the model (e.g. cannot save the model, or cannot delete ghost parts), using a model dump is one way of saving your work. To import a model dump: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open Tekla Structures and create a new model. Copy the model dump file (e.g. model.dmp) from an existing model folder into the new model folder. Click File > Import > Model dump. Save and close the model, then reopen it to see the model.
You can only import a model dump into a newly-created model. A model dump can only be imported once into one model. You can import the same model dump into several new models. Do not use import model dumps in multi-user mode. See also Exporting a model dump (p. 215).
ASCII import
This tool imports a model in ASCII format (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Some plant design systems export ASCII files (e.g. ModelDraft, PDS, PDMS). To import an ASCII model:
191
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
See also
Create a new model in Tekla Structures. Create a new 3D view. Copy the ASCII file into the model folder. Name the file import.asc. Select File > Import > ASCII. Tekla Structures displays the main members created from the ASCII file in the model.
ASCII format description (p. 192)
ASCII format description

Profiles and polygon plates can be exported and imported using the ASCII format described in this section. Each part is described by 8 lines. These lines are repeated for each part to be transferred. Units are always in millimeters, blanks are used as separator. Below is an example of a beam part description: import.asc
4169 HEA300 1 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000 A/6 BEAM S235JR S235JR 0.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000
The lines contain the following information:
192
Line Line 1
Description 4169 HEA300 1 = ID PROFILE TYPE

Line 2
ID 4169: Unique ID (integer). PROFILE HEA300: Profile name (string). TYPE 1: Profile type (integer) 0 = free cross section (can be used for special profiles which are not in the database) 1 = I profiles 2 = Welded hollow core profiles (HK, HQ) 3 = U profiles 4 = L profiles 5 = Round bars 6 = Round tubes 7 = Rectangular hollow core sections (RHS, P) 8 = T profiles 9 = Rectangular bars (FL, PL) 10 = Z profiles 11 = C profiles 12 = Omega profiles 13 = Sigma profiles 14 = Rail profile 16 = Reinforcement bars (DH) Polygon plates:
The available profile types are:
The contents of line 2 depend on the part profile:
N_POINTS COORDINATES. N_POINTS: For profiles of type 0. COORDINATES: Number of the corner points (integer). The X and Y coordinates of the plate corners (floating). Rotation direction is clockwise. Coordinates follow the global coordinate system. Z coordinates are taken from the center line in the plate thickness direction. Note: line 2 can be divided into several rows in the file.
Profiles:
For profile types 1-16, the line includes the physical dimensions of the cross section. HEIGHT S W1 T1 W2 T2: 290.000000 8.500000 300.000000 14.000000 300.000000 14.000000
HEIGHT 290.000000: Height of the cross section S 8.500000: Web thickness. W1 300.000000: Width of the upper flange. T1 14.000000: Thickness of the upper flange. W2 300.000000: Width of the lower flange. T2 14.000000: Thickness of the lower flange.
193
Line Line 3
Description A/6 BEAM = MARK NAME

Line 4 Line 5 Line 6
MARK A/6: Position mark of the part (string). NAME BEAM: Part name (string).
S235JR S235JR = MATERIAL Material of the part (string). 0.000000 = ROTATION Rotation angle (degrees) around the local x-axis of the beam. 16.500000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X1 Y1 Z1 Coordinates of the beam starting point. Z coordinates are center-line coordinates.
Line 7
6000.000000 24000.000000 4855.000000 = X2 Y2 Z2 Coordinates of the beam end point. Z-coordinates are centerline coordinates.
Line 8
16.500000 24000.000000 5855.000000 = X3 Y3 Z3 Direction vector showing the direction of the local z-axis.
Attribute import
Use File > Import > Attributes to import user-defined attribute values into a model from a text file. For example, you might import a list of manufactured or checked assemblies. The file to import can be:
Exported from other software Created manually using a standard text editor A simple Tekla Structures report containing the part IDs and user-defined attributes.
See About input files (p. 195) for more information on the import file. You can import user-defined attribute values into the entire model or drawing, or into a selected area of the model.
To save an Excel spreadsheet to a tab-delimited text file, use the Save As command in Excel.
To import user-defined attributes values: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Copy the text file that you want to import into the model folder. If you only want to import user-defined attributes into a selected area of the Tekla Structures model, select an area in the model now. Click File > Import > Attributes to open the Import Attributes dialog box. Click the Browse button next to the Input File field to locate the file to import. Select the delimiter used in the input file. Select an option in the Input scope list box. The options are:
194
Option
Default Entire model Selection only
Description Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the model. Tekla Structures only assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in the selected area of the model. Only use this option to import attributes into models. Do not use for drawings.
Reference models
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attribute values of objects in the input file to matching objects in reference models.
7.
Select an option in the Create log file list box. The options are: Description Creates a new log file named attribute_import.log in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. This overwrites any previous attribute import log files. Adds log entries to the attribute_import.log file in the current model folder each time you use File > Import > Attributes. If the log file does not exist, Tekla Structures creates it. Does not create a log file.
Option
Create
Append
No
8.
Select an option in the Display log file list box. The options are: Description Does not display the log file. Displays the log file in a separate window. Click an object ID in the log file to have Tekla Structures highlight the part in the model.
Option
No On dialog
9.
Click Create to import the file.
About input files

Input files are text files, which are delimited by a comma, tab, semi-colon, space or a userdefined delimiter. They contain the names and values of the user-defined attributes to import into the Tekla Structures model. In the input file, the column headings must contain the names of properties and user-defined attributes in model objects and drawings. The remaining rows contain the values of the properties and user-defined attributes. See Example input file for parts (p. 197).
If you want to use user-defined attributes of other value types than string in the input file, you need to define them in the file import_macro_data_types.dat. See Data types file (p. 197) for more information.
195
You must include at least one key field as a column heading. Key fields are drawing or model object properties. Tekla Structures uses these key fields to identify the model objects or drawings it will assign the user-defined attributes to. The key fields for model objects are:
Key field
ID
Example 131
Action Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the model object that has an ID value of 131. Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has an ASSEMBLY_POS value of A3 Repeat this line for each assembly you want to include.
ASSEMBLY_POS
A3
or
MARK
PHASE
Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the assembly that has a PHASE value of 2. You must also use ASSEMBLY_POS as a key field with this option.
The key fields for drawing objects are:
Key field
TYPE NAME
Example
A D4
Action Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the drawing that has a TYPE value of A and a MARK value of D4 Use both key fields in the input file. Tekla Structures assigns the user-defined attributes in this row in the input file to the drawing object that has an ID value of 134.
ID
134
To have Tekla Structures ignore an entry in a row, replace the value with the word null. Leaving the entry blank will cause errors.
Example input file for drawings

TYPE and NAME are the key fields in this input file. Tekla Structures adds a value for the userdefined attribute User field 4 to drawings with values that match those listed in the TYPE and NAME columns.
For example, a drawing with the TYPE A (assembly drawing) and NAME B.2 gets the value 4 in the User field 4.
196
attributes.txt
TYPE A A A A NAME B.1 B.2 C.1 C.2 DRAWING_USERFIELD_4 3 4 1 2
Example input file for parts

ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE are the key field in this input file. Tekla Structures adds several ASSEMBLY_POS and PHASE columns. For example, an assembly with the ASSEMBLY_POS
user-defined attributes to the assemblies with values that match those listed in the
(assembly number) of B5 in phase 1 gets the following user-defined attributes:
STATUS: 3 USER_PHASE: 6 USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
This input file contains repeat entries for B1. In this case, Tekla Structures writes the message Duplicate entry in input file in the log file and does not overwrite user-defined attributes that occur earlier in the file with those that occur later. For example, at the end of the attribute import, B1 will have the following user-defined attributes:
STATUS: 7 USER_PHASE: 3 USER_ISSUE: 3/25/2003
This input file is tab-delimited. You can also use a comma, semi-colon, space or a user-defined delimiter.
Data types file

The ..\environments\*your environment*\system\import_macro_data_types.dat file is a simple text file listing the user-defined attributes that you can include in an input file. Edit the file using any standard text editor. You can:
Change any of the user-defined attributes that are not key fields Add user-defined attributes as STRING, INT, FLOAT, or DATE variable types
The file contains the following columns:

VARIABLE_NAME, VARIABLE_TYPE, CONVERSION_FACTOR, COMMENT
Tekla Structures uses CONVERSION_FACTOR to convert imperial values to metric. Tekla Structures only uses this value in Imperial environments. We recommend that you check the FLOAT values to avoid conversion factor errors. Tekla Structures treats rows starting with double forward slash characters // as comments and ignores them when reading the file. Here is a sample section of the import_macro_data_types.dat file:
197
Variable name Variable type Conversion factor Comment Comment
Steelfab import
See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select SteelFab/SCIA Import from the Type list box.
Steelfab specific information

In the SteelFab/SCIA import dialog box:
Set Import weldings to Yes to include welds in the model. Set Import holes to Yes to include holes in the model. Enter the path, file name, and file extension of the import file in the ASCII file name field. If it is blank, Tekla Structures looks in the current model folder.
Fabtrol XML import

To import the fabrication status information of parts from a Fabtrol XML file into a Tekla Structures model: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click File > Import > Fabtrol XML.... Click the browse button (...) to locate the file for the Input file field. Select the required items on the Create log file and Display log file list boxes depending whether you want to create and display the log file. Click Create to import the status information.
198
S-Frame import
Import analysis models created by the FASTSOLVE suite of programs, so you can detail them in Tekla Structures. See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import S-Frame from the Type list box.
About S-Frame imports

The S-Frame model is used for analysis, so may not contain all the information necessary to create an accurate Tekla Structures model, particularly for positioning parts. Check the imported model carefully before you start detailing.
MicasPlus import
See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import MicasPlus from the Type list box.
MicasPlus specific information

In the Import MicasPlus dialog box, select Front or Top from the Part rotation list box.
Eureka LPM import

Eureka LPM (Logical Product Model) uses the CIMsteel (Computer Integrated Manufacturing) data exchange format. See Overview of importing models (p. 179) for how to import the model into Tekla Structures. In the New import model dialog box, select Import Eureka LPM from the Type list box.
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export

Description
Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed. Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly.
See also
Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 243) Import ELiPLAN status data
199
Import ELiPLAN status data

Importing status and scheduling information
If you have a status data file created in ELiPLAN, you can then import it into your Tekla Structures model with the Import Eliplan status data (69) component. For more information on transferring data between Tekla Structures and ELiPLAN, see Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 199).
The format and contents of this file are completely different than those in the file that is exported from Tekla Structures to ELiPLAN.
To import status and scheduling information from ELiPLAN to Tekla Structures: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Eliplan and click Search. Double-click Import data from EliPlan to open the Import Eliplan status data (69) dialog box. Select the status data file to import. When you click the Create button, Tekla Structures updates the status and schedule data for parts in the Tekla Structures model. When the data is read, Tekla Structures shows the log file in the list:
The list contains the parts whose data is updated correctly and also provides information on possible problems that may have occurred. When you select an item in the list, Tekla Structures automatically selects the corresponding part in the model. The overall status information is shown at the end of the list.
200
Tekla Structures stores the actual status data to the user-defined attributes of the parts. To view the data, open the user-defined attributes from the part properties dialog box.
The ELiPLAN-specific user-defined attributes are not in the default environment of Tekla Structures. You need to modify the objects.inp to use and view them. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.
7.4 Exporting files

Tekla Structures exports models in several formats. This section explains how to export models and drawings from Tekla Structures. Most of the export tools are available on the pull-down menu File > Export. You can also export drawings from the drawing list, click Drawings & Reports >
Drawing List....
Also, you can export your model to a web page using the command File > Publish as Web page... to make it available on the Internet, using a web browser. For more information, see Tekla WebViewer (p. 250).
Topics
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF (p. 202) Exporting 3D DGN (p. 203) Exporting drawings (p. 245) Exporting FEM (p. 204) Exporting CIMsteel (p. 205) Exporting CAD (p. 208)
201
Exporting MIS (p. 211) Exporting ASCII (p. 212) IFC export (p. 212) Exporting a model dump (p. 215)
Exporting 3D DWG/DXF
You can export models as a 3D DWG or 3D DXF file type to use in other modeling or analysis programs. By default, Tekla Structures creates the model.dwg file in the current model folder. To create a 3D DWG/DXF export file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open a Tekla Structures model. Select File > Export > 3D DWG/DXF... to open the Export 3D DWG/DXF dialog box. Modify the export options as required. Accept the default file name, or use Browse... to navigate to another file. Select whether to export as DWG or as DXF. To export the model, click: Export all to export the whole model, or
7.
Export selected to export selected parts from the model.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Export as
Following options are available:
Export as
Faces Lines
Description Exports parts as faces. Exports parts as lines located in the center of profile cross section. Used when exporting to analysis software. Exports parts as reference lines, drawn between the creation points. Used when exporting to analysis software.
Reference lines
Exporting 3D DWG or DXF files as Faces uses more memory and may take longer, but the end result is better. If the model is large, or you have less memory to use, Export asReference lines option is faster, and the resulting file size is smaller. Use the Faces option to change part and bolt accuracy, and select whether or not to export cuts and inner contours.
Field
Type
Option
Normal High
Description Also exports chamfers in profile crosssections.
202
Field
Bolt accuracy
Option
High Normal No bolts
Description Exports the entire bolt assemblies, including washers. Only exports the bolt and nut. Exports no bolts. Exports cuts. Exports radiused corners in cuts.
Cuts Inner contours
Yes Yes
None of these options exports bolt holes. Curved beams and polybeams are exported as single, continuous beams. The number of segments in the curved beams is as defined in the curved beam. For more information see Creating a curved beam. The ID of each part is exported as an attribute and written into the export file for each part.
Exporting 3D DGN
The 3D DGN export tool creates a model.dgn file in the current model folder, which you can import into other modeling systems. Follow these steps to export a 3D DGN file: 1. 2. 3. Open a Tekla Structures model. Select the objects in the model to export. Click File > Export > 3D DGN... to open the Export 3D DGN dialog box.
Enter the name of the export file, or click Browse... to locate it. Click Export all, or Export selected to export the selected parts. 4.
Settings
Tekla Structures creates the model.dgn file in your current model folder.
You can also use the following advanced options to control DGN exports:
XS_DGN_EXPORT_PART_AS XS_EXPORT_DGN_COORDINATE_SCALE XS_EXPORT_DGN_FILENAME XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_CUTS XS_EXPORT_DGN_INCLUDE_INNER_CONTOUR
203
Exporting FEM
There are several options for exporting a model with the FEM (Finite Element Method) export tool. To create a FEM export: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > FEM.... The FEM export dialog box appears. Click the Conversion tab and enter the path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 175). Click the Parameters tab. In the Output file field, accept the default, or use the browse (...) button to select another output file. Select an output file type:
5.
DSTV MicroSAS Staad
Select the parts in the model to export.
Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder.
Combine segments (MicroSAS)

Combine segmented members (MicroSAS) gives you the option to combine multiple parts to
form one part in the exported model. For example, if you have divided a beam into several elements and select the Yes option, Tekla Structures combines the elements so that they form one beam in the exported model. With the option No every element of the beam in the model forms individual beams.
STAAD
The options on the Staad tab are only relevant to Staad file types in the FEM export.
Parametric shapes when possible defines how Tekla Structures exports the profiles PL, P, D, PD, SPD to Staad. Yes exports the profiles as parametric shapes so that STAAD can identify them correctly. No exports all profiles as standard STAAD shapes. Example
Example of a plate PL10*200
Exported as parametric shape (Yes): 13 PRI YD 200.000000 ZD 10.000000 Exported as a standard shape (No): 13 TABLE ST PL10*200
If a profile is not defined on the Staad tab, Tekla Structures cannot identify it, and does not import it.
DSTV
The options on the DSTV tab only relate to DSTV file types in FEM export. Select a DSTV version to export in the Version list box.
Element reference with
Tekla Structures exports either a static model CROSS_SECTION, or a CAD model MEMBER_LOCATION. The DSTV entities are listed below. Tekla Structures supports those marked (*). See the DSTV standard "Stahlbau - Teil 1. Mrz 2000" for more information. Static data:
204
vertex (*) polyline substructure (*) node (*) element (*) element_eccentricity (*) raster boundary_condition elastic_support nodal_reaction element_reaction material (*) cross_section (*) member (*) member_location (*) construction-data cutout hole
General data:
CAD data:
Exporting CIMsteel
You have the following options when exporting a CIMsteel model:
Analysis model (p. 205) Manufacturing model (p. 206)
Analysis model
To export a CIMsteel analysis model: 1. 2. Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Analysis model. Use the option CIS to select the CIS (CIMsteel Intergration Standard) version.

3. 4. 5.
CIS/1 generates a file that is compatible with the CIMsteel LPM4DEP1 schema declaration. CIS/2 generates a file compatible with the CIMSteel CIS/2 (STRUCTURAL_FRAME_SCHEMA) schema declaration.
Enter the path and name for the export file in the Step file field or accept the default. If you do not enter a path, Tekla Structures creates the export file in the current model folder. If required, enter the a name and organization to identify who created the export file. Select one of the following standards (Flavor) to apply to the export:

6.
UK EUROPEAN US
Set units to metric or imperial.
205
units.
Imperial is only available for CIS/2. CIS/1 is always exported in metric
7. 8.
Enter values for the origin of the exported model. The origin comes from the origin in Tekla Structures. To split a part in the Tekla Structures model into several elements in a CIMsteel model, select Split members (Yes). As an example, three columns are connected to a beam in a model, so that one column is in the middle and the others are at each end of the beam. With the Yes option the beam is split into two equal elements in the CIMsteel model. With the No option there will be one beam, a single linear element, and two nodes (a node at each end), in the CIMsteel model. Select the parts in the model to export, then click Apply and Create.
9.
Manufacturing model
Follow these steps to export a CIS2 CIMsteel manufacturing model: 1. 2. Open a Tekla Structures model. If you want to include information on drawings and NC files in the export file, you need to Export or print needed drawings to the model folder in dwg format. See Exporting drawings (p. 245) or Printing to file. Create single-part drawings, and then create NC files with the extension .nc1. See DSTV (p. 159). Click File > Export > CIMSteel > Manufacturing model to export a model that contains all of the parts needed for manufacture and erection. Click the Parameters tab. Enter a name for the export file in the Output file field. CIS uses the file extension stp. Set Linear units to metric or imperial units (only for CIS/2 format). With Imperial units Tekla Structures writes all of the designations for nuts, bolts, and washers in fractional inches.
3. 4.
If required, enter a name for the structure in the Structure name field. Enter the path to the profile conversion file. For more information, see More CIMsteel information (p. 207). Enter the path to the material conversion file. For more information, see Import and export. If you leave the profile and material conversion file paths empty, Tekla Structures uses the conversion files in the current profile folder for the conversion.
To export globally unique IDs instead of internal ID numbers, select Yes in the Export Globally unique IDs list box.
206
5. 6. 7. 8.
In the Manufacturing model tab, set Include NC files to Yes to include information on NC files in an export. Specify a path (relative to the current model folder) to the folder where the NC files are located. Click the Standards tab to enter information about the standard. Select the parts in the model to export. Click Apply and then Create. Tekla Structures creates the export file in your current model folder.
More CIMsteel information

Profile conversion
This example shows part of the profile conversion file prfexp_cis.cnv:

! ! ! ! ! US Imperial Flavor Profile name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name. Converted-name
! Tekla Structures-name
! !American Sections - Imperial !W - Wide Flange Beams W44X335 S\SECT\US\W44X335\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X290 S\SECT\US\W44X290\ASTM_A6\1994 W44X262 S\SECT\US\W44X262\ASTM_A6\1994 Converted-name contains the following information, each value separated by a back slash \:
S (fixed value) SECT (fixed value) Name of the standardization organization Standard name of the profile shape Name of the standard Year of the standard
If the conversion file does not contain the relevant profile type, the Tekla Structures name of the profile is used. Tekla Structures also uses the Standardization organization, Standard name and Year of standard defaults on the Profile standard tab.
Material conversion
This example shows part of the material conversion file matexp_cis.cnv:

! ! ! ! ! US Imperial Flavor Material name conversion Tekla Structures -> CIS If Converted-name does not exist, it will be the same as Tekla Structures-name. Converted-name
! Tekla Structures-name
# Carbon Structural Steel (ASTM_A36\1994) GRADE32 S\MAT\US\GRADE32\ASTM_A36-94\1994 GRADE36 S\MAT\US\GRADE36\ASTM_A36-94\1994 #High Strength Carbon Manganese Steel (ASTM_A529\1994 GRADE42 S\MAT\US\GRADE42\ASTM_A529-94A\1994)
character (\):
Converted-name contains the following information, each item separated by the backslash
207
S (fixed value) MAT (fixed value) Name of the standards organization Standard name of the material Name of the standard Year of the standard
Converted-name contains the following information about bolts, nuts, and washers, separated by two colon characters (::):
Name of the standards organization Name of the standard Year of the standard Standard name of the bolt, washer, or nut
Tekla Structures names for bolts, washers, and nuts are constructed from their fastener standard, fastener type and size. If the conversion file does not contain an equivalent profile name, Tekla Structures uses the name of the material.
standard tabs for materials, bolts, nuts and washers:
Tekla Structures takes the following default values from the Material standard and Bolt
Field
Standardization organization
Description The organization that published the standard. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files. The name or number of the standard. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures places an empty entry ("") in CIS/2 files.
Name of standard
Year of standard
The year the standard was published. If the field is left blank, Tekla Structures uses 1999 as the default value.
Exporting CAD
You can export a CAD model in several formats. To export a CAD model: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open a Tekla Structures model. Click File > Export > CAD... to open the CAD export dialog box. Click the Conversion tab and enter path to the required conversion files. For more information about conversion files, see Conversion files (p. 175). Click the Parameters tab. In the Output file field, accept the default, use the browse (...) button to select another output file. Select one of the output formats in the Type list box:
208
Format
PML
Description
PML exports files in Intergraphs Parametric Modeling Language format. The PML export can be used with several Intergraph systems. HLI (High Level Interface) option is used for exporting data to IEZ AGs Speedikon software. SCIA is used for SteelFab interface. Calma option is used for exporting data to the Calma
HLI SCIA Calma SDNF PDMS
plant design system.
SDNF (Steel Detailing Neutral File) option is used to
export models for use in several different CAD systems.
PDMS (Plant Design Management System) option is used to export models for use with the Cadcentres 3d plant design software. For more information, see PDMS (p. 211). SDNF (PDMS) is used for exporting information to PDMS via SDNF link. Tekla Structures writes the information of finish field in the member class attribute, whereas in SDNF export it omits the class information. XML is used for exporting information to ArchiCAD modeling system. There are some limitations in the export:
SDNF (PDMS)
XML

7. 8. 9.
Conversion files are not used. Holes, bolts and welds are not exported.
Use the Origin X, Y, Z fields to specify the origin of the exported model. Select the parts in the model to export. Click Apply and then Create.
Tekla Structures then creates the export file in your current model folder.
PML
For PML output format, use the following options on the PML tab.
Select the units for the export model.

Export cut parts controls whether cuts are included in the export. Select Yes to export part
cuts.
When you export models from Tekla Structures into an other software using PML, enter the Tekla Structures profile names in the conversion file. This makes the other software consider parts as beams and columns (not as plates), and reduces the export file size. The following advanced options control PML export:
PML_ASSEMBLY_MARKS_IN_USE PML_CARDINAL_POINT_NOT_IN_USE
SDNF
For SDNF, SDNF(PDMS), or PDMS output formats, use the following options on the SDNF tab.
209
Field
SDNF version number Apply cuts and fittings Position number type
Description Select the SDNF version to be used in the export. Select Yes (default) applies cuts and fittings in the export. The SDNF file contains identifiers, which can be included in a parts user-defined attributes, or as position numbers. You have the following options:
Part position
The identifier becomes the parts position number. Do not use the Part Pos_No fields with this option.
Assembly position
The identifier becomes the assemblys position number.

Universal ID
The identifier becomes a user-defined attribute for the part. To make user-defined attributes visible, you need to add them to the objects.inp file. For more information on defining attributes in objects.inp, see Adding properties (p. 75).
Consider offsets
To ignore the offset records during export, select No, and to take them into account, select Yes. This setting does not affect the actual start and end point information, only the offset. Tekla Structures writes the start and end points based on the actual solid, not on the reference line.
PDMS phase offset
PDMS phase offset defines phase offset for exported parts.
For example, if the first phase in Tekla Structures model is 1 and you enter 10 for phase offset, the Tekla Structures parts in another software get the phase 11 and up.
Engineering Firm Client Structure ID Project ID Revision Number
Enter the name of the engineering firm. Enter the name of the client. Enter a unique identification number for the exported model. Enter a unique identification number for the exported project. Enter a revision number (optional). Tekla Structures takes the revision number from the user-defined attributes (REVISION_NUMBER) of the model. If this field is blank, Tekla Structures uses a revision number from the CAD export dialog box (Revision Number). Tekla Structures writes the issue code in the header section of the output file. For PDMS, this value should always be "Tekla Structures". Define the design code to be used in structural design. For more information, see Design codes and methods.
Issue Code
Design Code
XML
For XML output formats, use the following options on the XML tab:
210
Use Units to specify unit conversions. For example, for a Tekla Structures model created using millimeters, select IN to convert all part dimensions to inches in the output file. XML structure ID is a unique identification number for the exported model. You must always enter an identification number. Tekla Structures uses this value to identify the model if you re-export it.
PDMS
Tekla Structures uses some of the information you enter on the SDNF tab. It supports two different PDMS export formats, EXTRUSION and NOZZLE. Tekla Structures decides which export format to use by searching for the Tekla Structures profile name in the profile conversion file (by default, prfexp_pdms.cnv). If the profile is not there, Tekla Structures exports the part in both EXTRUSION and NOZZLE formats.
When you add a profile to the NOZZLE catalog, you must also add it to the profile conversion file.
Using EXTRUSION elements
EXTRUSION transfers data from Tekla Structures to PDMS using EXTRUSION elements. Tekla Structures describes profiles in the export file using the vertices of the profiles. So you can also export contour plates and bent plates. Tekla Structures exports profiles as solids, which may not be suitable for some profile types (e.g. tubes). You can also transfer data from Tekla Structures to PDMS by loading a NOZZLE catalog into a PDMS project. The NOZZLE catalog is contained in the file load_nozz_cata.mac, located in the European profile folder. This file describes the profiles you can export to PDMS systems. It also enables Tekla Structures to use NOZZLE elements. This format creates exact profiles (even for tube profiles), and a smaller export file than the EXTRUSION option. You can edit the NOZZLE catalog with a text editor to add profiles to it.
Loading a NOZZLE catalog
Exporting MIS
Use the MIS (Manufacturing Information System) tool to create list files. You can create them from selected parts, or from all the parts in the model. The MIS command creates the following file types: DSTV, KISS, EJE, EPC, or Steel 2000. To create an MIS list file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > MIS... to display the Export MIS dialog box. In the MIS type list box, select the file type. See MIS types (p. 211). In the MIS list file field, enter the name of the list file, including the file extension. You need to use specific file extensions for some file types. See MIS list file (p. 212) for a list of file extensions. Click Create all or Create selected. Tekla Structures creates the MIS file in the current model folder.
MIS types
The file types you can use for MIS output are:
DSTV
The file only contains the MIS information for the DSTV model.
Fabtrol/KISS
211
Gives you the following additional options:

EJE
Customer name Full material list. Check this box to add labor-related information to the list (holes, welds, cambers, preliminary marks, etc.).
US Imperial version only.
Structural Material Manager internally stores all dimensions in sixteenths. Its External Data Interface writes all dimensions, such as widths, lengths, etc, except for Beam and Channel descriptions, in sixteenths of an inch. As an example the length 12'-8 7/8 is equivalent to 2446 sixteenths, which is calculated as (feet x 192) + (inches x 16) + sixteenths.
EPC
The EPC (Estimating and Production Control) module of SDS/2 requires multinumbering to be active.
Steel 2000
MIS list file

Use the following MIS list file extensions, according to which file type you are creating:
Type
DSTV Fabtrol/KISS EJE EPC Steel 2000
File extension xsr kss eje None None
Exporting ASCII
To export an ASCII file of a model: 1. 2. 3.
See also
Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export. Select the parts of the model you want to export. Click File > Export > ASCII. Tekla Structures creates the model.asc file in the current model folder.
ASCII format description (p. 192)
IFC export
You can export Tekla Structures physical models as IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) models. You can export all basic parts in the Tekla Structures model such as beams, columns, braces, slabs, panels, plates, and bolts with nuts and washers. When you export Tekla Structures physical models as IFC models, you can use either Coordination view or a simplified sub-set format called Presentation view as the export type. Additional Quantity takeoff add-on view is always included to the exported IFC model. For more information on the Quantity takeoff add-on view, see IFC base quantities (p. 214).
212
Grids, surface treatments and welds are not included in the export.
Supported schemas
The IFC export functionality in Tekla Structures supports the following schemas:
IFC2X IFC2X2 IFC2X3 (recommended)
You can export the model in STEP IFC format or XML-based ifcXML format. You can use compressed or uncompressed export files.
See also
Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects (p. 213) Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file (p. 214) Exporting user-defined attributes and template attributes as property sets into IFC models (p. 215)
Defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects
Before you export Tekla Structures model objects, you can define the resulting IFC entities for the exported model objects by using user-defined attributes. To do this: 1. 2. Double-click the part to open the part properties dialog box, and click User-defined attributes... button. Use the options on the IFC export tab to define the resulting IFC entities for the exported model object. For more information on how Tekla Structures model objects are mapped as IFC objects, see the table below. Click the OK button in the user-defined attributes dialog box. Click the OK button in the part properties dialog box.
3. 4.
Mapping to IFC
Tekla Structures object Beam Column, Pile Polybeam Curved beam Pad footing, Strip footing Slab Panel Contour plate Bolts, nuts and washers
Color of the exported objects
IFC entity (IfcBuildingElementPart and IfcBuildingElementProxy entities can also be used) IfcBeam, IfcMember IfcColumn, IfcPile, IfcMember IfcBeam, IfcMember IfcBeam, IfcMember IfcFooting IfcSlab IfcWall or IfcWallStandardCase IfcPlate IfcMechanicalFastener
The color of the exported objects is defined according to the class definition, in the following manner:
213
Class definition 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Color Grey Red Green Dark blue Cyan Yellow Dark magenta Dark grey Dark red Dark green Dark cyan Magenta Orange Blue
Exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file

To export a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the model objects to export. Click File > Export > IFC... Select the schema edition to be used in the export from the options in the Schema edition list box. Browse for the Output file location and enter the file name. The file extension (.ifc, .ifcXML or .ifcZIP) is automatically added to the file name. The length of the file path is limited to 256 characters.
5.
Set other export properties if needed: Export type: Select Coordination view for data transfer between applications or Presentation view for viewing and design coordination. XML format: Select whether to export the file in XML format. If you select Yes, the file format of the exported file is .ifcXML. Compression: Select whether to compress the export file. If you select Yes, the file format of the exported file is .ifcZIP. Assemblies, Bolts, Reinforcing bars: Select Yes to export the corresponding objects in the model. Click Create.
6.
IFC base quantities

The additional Quantity takeoff add-on view includes the following information on the entities in the exported IFC model:
214
Beam Width Height Length Net area Outer surface area Gross footprint area Net volume Net weight X X X X
Column
Slab X
Wall X X X
X X X
X X X X X X X
Exporting user-defined attributes and template attributes as property sets into IFC models
You can export user-defined attributes and template attributes as property sets into IFC models. You can also create multiple sets and name the sets as required. To do this: 1. Search for the attributes you want to export in the following files: User-defined attributes in the file objects.inp, located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\inp Template attributes in the file contentattributes_global.lst, located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\templat e\settings Open the file IFC_properties_sets.inp located in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\country-independent\inp by using any standard text editor. This file defines which attributes are exported and in what format they are exported. Possible formats are STRING, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE. All the attributes with the same property set name will be joined to the same property set. 3. Enter the property sets to be exported in the file using the following syntax:
<Exported IFC Property set name> <Exported IFC Property name> <User-defined or template attribute> <Value type of attribute>
2.
An example of a possible property set would be:

My_property_set_name My_property_name USER_FIELD_1 STRING
Exporting a model dump

A model dump creates an ASCII file of a model that you can use in other models. To export a model dump file: 1. 2. Open the Tekla Structures model to export. Click File > Export > Model dump.
Tekla Structures creates the model.dmp file in the current model folder.
215
The model dump file contains the entire model, including views and drawings.
See also Model dump import (p. 191).
Exporting BVBS
Description
This component exports the geometry of reinforcements into BVBS (Bundesvereinigung Bausoftware) format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. The supported versions of the BVBS format are:
1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000
The component is able to export bent reinforcing bars, reinforcing bar groups and polygonal or rectangle not-bent meshes. The export of the hooks is also supported.
Limitations Example 1
Each point of unbent reinforcement must lie on the same plane (BF3D export is not supported). Exporting reinforcements with standard bending radius:
216
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l922@n1@e0.790@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl375@w90@l547@w0@ C85@ Example 2
Exporting reinforcements with non-standard bending radius:
BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l831@n1@e0.728@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl163@w0@r200@w90@ l335@w0@C84@ See also
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format (p. 218)
217
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 218) BVBS (78) specification (p. 220)
Exporting reinforcement to BVBS format

To export the geometry of the selected reinforcement to the BVBS format, follow the steps below.
Preconditions
If you create a new reinforcement in an actual model, you need to close and re-open the export dialog box. 1. 2. 3. Select the reinforcing bars to export. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in BVBS and click Search. Doubleclick Export rebar BVBS (78) to open the component dialog box. Set the following options in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box: a Set Selection to Selected rebars only. b Set Standard bending radius to Use Tekla standards. c Set Draw rebars to Yes to see the exported geometry in the model after exporting. Click Create. Check the exported geometry. Find the name of the exported file in the component output window. Check the created file in the current model folder.
Usage
4. 5. 6. 7. Result
Using this component creates one output file. The output file is created in the current model folder. The file name depends on the settings in the dialog box and it is shown in the console output window (see the picture). The existing files are rewritten. To check the exported geometry, set Draw rebars to Yes.
See also
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box (p. 218) BVBS (78) specification (p. 220)
Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box

This section describes the fields in the Export rebar BVBS (78) dialog box.
218
Configuration
Field
File name Ext file name Version
Description Specify the name of the output file. The default file name is Project Number. Specify the extension of the output file. The default file extension is txt. Specify the version of the BVBS format. The supported versions of BVBS are: 1.0 year 1995 2.0 year 2000
Selection
Define which reinforcements will be exported.

2D rebars 3D rebars Spiral rebars Not bent meshes Bent meshes Standard bending radius
All rebars in the model no preselected parts are
required, all reinforcements from the current model are exported. Selected rebars only only the selected reinforcements are exported. All rebars of selected concrete elements only reinforcements that belong to the selected concrete parts are exported.
Export single reinforcing bars and groups consisting of straight bars. Export bent reinforcing bars. Not supported at the moment. Export spiral reinforcements. Not supported at the moment. Export unbent meshes. Polygonal and rectangle meshes are supported. Export bent meshes. Not supported at the moment. Specify the value of the standard bending radius.

Radius coef
Use Tekla standards: Each material and diameter has its own initial bending radius in Tekla Structures. These values are used for each reinforcing bar group from the file \environments\*your_environment*\ profil\rebar_database.inp (Column Min bend rad). These values are used for the standard bending radius. Use radius coef: the standard bending radius is the bending radius of the exported reinforcing bars multiplied with Radius coef. Use rebar radius: the bending radius of exported reinforcing bars is used as the standard bending radius.
Define the number used for the computation of the standard bending radius. Entire number is required. Used only if Standard bending radius is set to Radius coef.
219
Field
Draw rebars
Description Draw the exported geometry in the model. It is represented by the lines created inside reinforcements (straight bars and meshes) or on the side of reinforcements (bent bars). In case of 180 hooks, the hook line is inside the main line.
Ignored classes
List of classes. Reinforcements with classes in this list will not be exported. E. g. 5 7 17.
BVBS (78) specification

Each exported reinforcing bar or group of the same reinforcing bars has one row in the exported file. One row consists of a HEADER block, a GEOMETRY block and a CHECKSUM block.
Example BF2D@Hj57@r0@ia@p1@l5950@n1@e5.284@d12@gA500HW@s30@v@Gl5950@w0@C84@
Header block starts with the letter H.

Measuring
j Project number r Plan number not used, exported as 0 i Plan index not used, exported as a p Position index of the output file row is exported l Total length of reinforcement n Number of reinforcements e Weight of one rod d Reinforcement diameter g Material s Standard bending radius (see below) v Author not used l particular length w bending angle r bending radius (relates to the standard bending radius, see below) see the BVBS specification
Geometry block starts with the letter G.
CheckSum block starts with the letter C.
Measuring of the length is done according to the BVBS specification. Calculation of lengths also depends on the bending angle. Lengths L1 and L2 are exported.
220
Standard bending radius
The bending radius affects the export of the reinforcements. If the bending radius is the same for the entire reinforcing bar and this bending radius is set by dialog box field Standard bending radius (is also written in exported HEADER block), these bending radiuses are not exported in the GEOMETRY block. Otherwise the bending radiuses are exported for each bending. The value of the bending radius can be set in fields Standard bending radius and Radius coef in the dialog box.
Exporting Unitechnik
Description
This component exports the 3D geometry of the cast units into Unitechnik format. The result is a text file in ASCII format. Supported versions of the Unitechnik format are:
6.0.0 14.6.2005 5.2b 11.9.2000 5.0c 30.10.1997
This component is able to export cast units consisting of concrete, steel and surface materials. Exporting of reinforcing bars (bent and not-bent), reinforcing bar groups and meshes with hooks is also supported. This component also supports exporting of braced girders, solid, sandwich and double walls.
Example 1
Exported cast unit:
221
Hole Steel embed Reinforcing bars Insulation plate (green)

See also
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format (p. 222) Unitechnik export reference (p. 225) Main (p. 225) Unitechnik configuration (p. 230) TS configuration (p. 234) Reinforcement (p. 239) Data specification (p. 243)
Exporting cast units to Unitechnik format

To export the geometry of the selected cast units to the Unitechnik format follow the steps below.
Preconditions
This component reads and exports some data from the numbering series of parts. It is important to have all exported parts numbered correct. Incorrectly numbered parts are not exported.
222
from list.
The parts you need to select depend on the selected option in the Create
Usage
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7. 8. 9. 10. Result
Update numbering. Select one object of a cast unit. Click Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type in Unitechnik and click Search. Double-click the Export unitechnik (79) to open the Export unitechnik (79) dialog box. On the Main tab, set the Create from to Selected cast units. On the TS configuration tab, set the following fields: a Draw profs to Yes to see exported geometry in the model after creating the component. b Insulation classes to 3. Green object with class 3 will be considered as insulation plate. c Embeds to Selected + steel (orange steel objects will be considered as embeds) On the Reinforcement tab, set the following fields: a Single rebars export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the top concrete panel. b Mesh export to Yes to export reinforcing bars in the bottom concrete panel. Click Create. Check the exported geometry. Search the name of the exported file in the component output window. Check the created file in the current model folder.
This component creates one or several output files. Number of created output files depends on the option selected in the Create from list and the total number of selected parts, cast units or assemblies.
If the scanning direction is wrong, use the Rotation and Extra rotation fields. Wrong scanning plane (from the right side to the left side):
223
Correct scanning plane (from back to front side):
See also
Exporting Unitechnik (p. 221)
224
Unitechnik export reference (p. 225) Data specification (p. 243)
Unitechnik export reference

Object geometry scanning
This component uses scanning layers to obtain the geometry of all parts in a cast unit. The number of the scanning layers depends on the selected scan position. Each object of the cast unit is scanned in one direction, which can be set with the Rotation and Extra rotation properties.
Draw profs property.
Real scanned geometry can be shown in the model after you have used the component with the
Insulation Embeds
All parts considered as insulation are exported in the MOUNTPART block. All embeds are exported in the MOUNTPART block. Other properties that affect the export of embeds are Export assemblies and Cut outer assemblies. If the embed block consists of several parts, it is useful to weld all embeds into one block and then connect the created block with a concrete part to a cast unit. Subassemblies are also supported. This component can export single and groups of straight reinforcing bars, rectangular or polygonal meshes. The export of the bent reinforcing bars and bent meshes is ignored. The reinforcing bar group, rectangular or polygonal mesh is divided into several single reinforcing bars. All reinforcing bars are exported in the RODSTOCK block. The exported geometry can be shown with Draw profiles. This property shows the inside lines of the exported reinforcing bars. Hooks are also supported. If Export type is set to Fabrication of welded rebars, the single reinforcing bar is exported in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one group are exported together in one STEELMAT block, all reinforcing bars of one mesh are also exported together in one STEELMAT block. The class of reinforcements, steel rods or profiles representing braced girder has to be entered in the Braced girder classes box. For example 15 17 5 means that parts with class 15, 17, or 5 are considered as braced girders. If the Braced girder export and Braced girder classes boxes are not used, the braced girders will be exported incorrectly as reinforcement or embeds.
Reinforcement
Braced girders
Double walls
Set the user-defined attribute Product type (UT product type) of the first panel to Double wall (1st stage). Set the other panel to Double wall (2nd stage). Double wall panels are exported separately in UNITECHNIK.
Main
This describes the fields on the Main tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Create from
This option defines the parts or cast-units that are exported.
225

Rotation
All parts: preselected parts are not required, all cast units from the current model are exported. Each cast unit has one output file. Selected cast units: exports only cast units that have one or more parts selected in the model. Each cast unit has one output file. Selected parts (specially): exports only the selected concrete parts (also embeds and insulation parts belonging to the selected part). Each part has one output file. Selected parts (cast united): selected parts belonging to one cast unit are grouped and exported together in one output file. Selected assemblies: all selected assemblies are exported. One assembly equals one cast unit and has one output file. Selection of subassemblies is also allowed. By CU id: each cast unit has its own output file. By CU pos: identical cast units share an output file.
This option defines the scanning direction. The scanning direction depends on the plane of the cast unit main part. A floor panel is scanned from bottom to top side. A wall panel and a column are scanned from one side to the other side. The position and direction of a basic shape of the exported cast unit depends on the rotation.
Option
No
Description Floor: Bottom to top Wall: Front to rear side Column: Side to side
Example
180
Floor: Top to bottom Wall: Rear to front side Column: From one side to the opposite side
+90 around X
Floor: Left to right side Wall: Top to bottom Column: Side to side
226
Option
-90 around X
Description Floor: Right to left side Wall: Bottom to top Column: From one side to the opposite side
Example
+90 around Y
Floor: Front to rear side Wall: Left to right side Column: Bottom to top
-90 around Y
Floor: Rear to front side Wall: Right to left side Column: Top to bottom
Extra rotation
This affects the rotation around the Z coordinate. The Z coordinate still has the same direction, but the X and Y direction are changed. To show the actual coordinate system, set Draw axis to Yes on the TS configuration tab.
Option
No Swap X/Y X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) main part X=max(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit X=min(X_dim,Y_dim ) cast unit +90 around Z - 90 around Z 180 around Z
Description No extra rotation. Swap X and Y axis. X axis goes through the longer side of the main part. X axis goes through the shorter side of the main part. X axis goes through the longer side of the cast unit. X axis goes through the shorter side of the cast unit. Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 90 degrees. Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by -90 degrees. Rotates X and Y axis around Z axis by 180 degrees.
227
The following picture shows the coordinate system with no rotation and no extra rotation settings. Panel 1 has the X axis set parallel to the shorter side. It is incorrect in Unitechnik format, so the coordinate system has to be rotated. Panel 2 shows a rotation by 90 degrees around the Z axis.
Special assemblies export / Special export assembly file name
These properties influence the exported geometry of the embeds. The real geometry is replaced by the geometry defined in special text files. The default name of the text file is spec_assemblies_def.txt and is primary searched in the model folder. The file name and path can be specified by the Special export assembly file name property. Required structure of text file is:
Name(text) Number_of_lines_defined(number) S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number) S(representing single line) Start_coors(number number) End_coors(number number)
Example of the file:
The geometry of all embeds with names (from example Quicky, QuickyS, E-Doze) are replaced by geometry defined in the text file. In the following example, the part number 1 (the name is Beam) was not found in the text file so the geometry is exact. On the opposite side the part number 2 (the name is Quicky) was found, so the geometry is replaced.
228
Export assemblies
Specifies export of embeds and steel blocks.
Option
Description Exports embeds as parts. All embedded welds and assembly relations are ignored. The exported geometry is a projection of the objects into the basic shape.
Welded embeds and the assembly block are exported as one part.
Exports only the main part of the embedded block or embedded assembly.
Exports the main part of the embedded block extended in the X direction to cover all the parts of the embedded block.
Exports only the bounding box around the main part of the embedded block or embedded assembly.
Def export code
Defines the computation method of the insertion point and the direction for embeds. Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23, 31 and 32. Defines how the embedded parts that are outside the concrete element are exported.
Cut outer assemblies
229
Option
Description Exports all parts in the embed.
Exports only the embedded parts that are inside of the concrete element. Embedded parts that are outside the concrete element are ignored. If an embedded part is partly inside a concrete element, the exported geometry of the embedded part is changed to cut. Same as the previous option, but only embedded parts with class specified in Cut outer only classes are taken into account.
Cut outer only classes Show error dialog boxes
Lists the classes of parts whose geometry is changed to cut, when you have selected the last option in the Cut outer assemblies list. Defines if an error message is shown when exported parts are not numbered correctly or when the embedded parts have no parent part.
Unitechnik configuration
This describes the fields on the Unitechnik configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Directory path
Defines where the empty export files are stored. The default folder is..\<model folder>\UT_Files. Specifies the name of the output file and file name extension. The options are:
File name
Proj_number.Cast_unit_number Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos Proj_number.Ass_control_number Proj_name.Cast_unit_number Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos Proj_name.Ass_control_number Cast_unit_number.user_extension Cast_unit_pos.user_extension Ass_control_number.user_extension Proj_name.Cast_unit_pos.ID_user_extension Proj_number.Cast_unit_pos.ID_user_extension
Cast_unit_number is the assembly position number of the main part of the cast unit. Cast_unit_pos is the assembly position of the main part of the cast unit. Ass_control_number is a special user-defined attribute, a unique number that Tekla Structures generates. To generate the assembly control numbers, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign control numbers. This requires the following definition in the ..\environments\country_independent\inp\objects.inp for concrete parts: unique_attribute("ACN", "j_acn", integer, "%d", no, none, "0.0", "0.0"){ value("", 0)} user_extension is defined with the File name extension property.
230
ID_user_extension is the ID number, which is 10 characters long. If the ID number is not 10 characters long, zeros are added in front of the ID number to make it 10 characters long. For example, id number 456999 will be 0000456999. Ext file name
Specifies the file name extension, if the File name is set to an option containing .user_extension. Specifies the format (length) of the output file name and file name extension. Numbers represent the length of the output string. If the name is longer than the selected option, it is cut. Symbol x represents unlimited size. Specifies the version of Unitechnik. Supported versions are:
File mask
Version

Blank symbol
6.0.0 5.0c
14.6.2005 30.10.1997
5.2b 11.9.2000
Specifies the blank symbol. An example with "_" symbol:
An example with " " symbol:
Layer structure
Defines the structure of the exported file (slab date and layer part).
231
Option
Multiple layers
Description One SLABDATE block with N layers. Each cast unit has its own LAYER block. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belong to one concrete part, and they are exported in the related LAYER block.
HEADER__ SLABDATE LAYER___ END LAYER___ LAYER___ END LAYER___ LAYER___ END LAYER___ END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Single layer, 1 slabdate
Each cast unit has its own SLABDATE block, no LAYER blocks.
HEADER__ SLABDATE END SLABDATE SLABDATE END SLABDATE SLABDATE END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Single layer, n slabdate
Cast units with equal geometry are collected in one SLABDATE block. No LAYER and LOT blocks are defined. Embeds, reinforcement and insulations belonging to a cast unit with the same geometry are collected and exported in one SLABDATE block.
HEADER__ SLABDATE END SLABDATE SLABDATE END SLABDATE END HEADER__
Geometry export
Specifies if the geometry of the exported part is represented as polygons or lines. Below are two examples of the output file showing the differences between the polygons and the lines exported. Polygons exported:
232
Lines exported:
233
Pallet width
Defines the pallet width, which is used for double wall production, when calculating the offset of wall shell 1 in regards to wall shell 2.
TS configuration
This describes the fields on the TS configuration tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Draw axis
Shows the coordinate system. The X axis is a line consisting of single points. The Y axis is a line consisting of doubled points line. The Z axis is a line consisting of three points in line. This option allows you to check, if the geometry of the exported parts is correct. It shows the lines representing the exported rectangle of the basic shape, the exported geometry of parts, cuts, embeds, and reinforcement. Embeds are projected to the plane of the basic shape. The reinforcement lines are positioned inside each reinforcing bar.
Draw profiles
234
Basic shape Geometry of main element. Cut geometry Embed geometry

Scan position
Defines the position in which all parts are scanned. Each part is scanned separately. Scanning plane is parallel to the basic shape plane.
Option
Bottom and top Bottom only Top only Middle only
Description Two scanning planes at the start and at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part. One scanning plane at the start of the bounding box of the scanning part. One scanning plane at the end of the bounding box of the scanning part. One scanning plane at the middle of bounding box of the scanning part.
distance in material properties. Start distance in material End distance in material Contour export
To move the position of the exact scanning plane, use the Start distance in material and End Defines the start offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane. Defines the end offset of scanning. This property moves the scanning plane. This component is able to export one scanned layer only. With two scanned layers, they have to be recomputed into one layer. Two options of recomputation are:
235
Option
Intersection
Description Make polygons intersection (AND operation) of two contour geometries.
Layer scanned first Layer scanned the second. Layers

Union
Makes polygons union (OR operation) of two contour geometries
Cutout export Ignored classes Normal embeds
The same as Contour export, but for holes only. List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will not be exported. Defines the parts that are considered as embeds. Embedded parts are exported in the MOUNTPART block.

Insulation classes Electric tubes classes Opening embed classes
Selected + steel: all classes listed in the Embed classes list are considered as embeds. All steel parts are also considered as embeds. Selected: classes listed in the Embed classes list are only considered as embeds. No export: ignores the Embed classes list and exports all steel parts as standard parts.
List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as insulation parts. List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as MOUNTPART with lines geometry. List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported as normal embeds in the MOUNTPART block. The geometry will not be considered in the CONTOUR and CUTOUT blocks of the concrete part. List of classes. Parts with classes in this list will be exported only in regard to their geometry in the CUTOUT block of the concrete part. They will not be exported in the MOUNTPART block.
Opening cutout classes
Line attributes
This describes the fields on the Line attributes tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component. Sometimes line attribute values that are exported in the Unitechnik files are not suitable for the situation in hand. For example, to preserve lightness in the model, you might have fewer chamfers in the model than there will be in the actual structure. For this reason, you might want to override some line attributes in the export so that the model stays light, but the exported Unitechnik files are correct. You can do this by using the options on the Line attributes tab.
236
Export line attributes for contour, Export line attributes for cutouts
Define whether the line attribute values are used for contours (Export line attributes for contour) or holes (Export line attributes for cutouts) in the export:
None: line attribute values are not used. All lines: line attribute values are used for all lines. Outmost lines only: line attribute values are used for only for outmost lines in the part:
This option is available only for contours.

Border line overriding options
You can enter up to six border line overrides in the line attribute export. The options are:
Option
Description No border lines are overridden.
Vertical outmost border lines at the start are overridden.
Horizontal outmost border lines at the bottom are overridden.
Vertical outmost border lines at the end are overridden.
Horizontal outmost border lines at the top are overridden.
Vertical outmost border lines are overridden.
Horizontal outmost border lines are overridden.
237
Option
Description Horizontal and vertical outmost border lines are overridden.
All inclined outmost border lines are overridden.
All outmost border lines are overridden.
All vertical border lines, except the outmost border lines are overridden.
All horizontal border lines, except the outmost border lines are overridden.
All vertical and horizontal border lines except the outmost border lines are overridden.
All border lines except outmost border lines are overridden.
All border lines except the horizontal and vertical outmost border lines are overridden.
All border lines are overridden.
Orig. attr, New attr. Example
attr.).
Define the original attribute (Orig. attr) and the attribute that will be used in the export (New
In the example below horizontal outmost border line at the top would get a line attribute value 0033 originally, but the value will be overridden, and the line attribute value in the Unitechnik file will be 0040.
238
Reinforcement
The fields on the Reinforcement tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component are described below.
Rebars export Bent rebars export Meshes export Bent meshes export Braced girder export
When set to Yes, allows exporting of straight reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported. When set to Yes, allows exporting of bent reinforcing bars. Hooks are supported. When set to Yes, allows exporting of polygonal or rectangular meshes. Hooks are supported. Not supported at the moment. When set to Yes, reinforcing bars or steel rods representing braced girders are exported separately in the BRGIRDER block. When set to No and if Single rebars export is Yes, then straight reinforcing bars representing braced girders are exported normally as rebars, steel rods are exported as mounted parts.
Braced girder classes Braced girder type
List of classes. Parts with classes in this list are exported as braced girders. Defines the string value of girder type field in the BRGIRDER block in the exported file. The options are:

Export type
Empty: No string is exported. Name: The name of the braced girder type is exported. If the name of the top part of braced
girder is empty, the names of the rods are checked. UDA: user-defined attribute value of the braced girder is exported.
User defined text: The value you enter in the box next to this option is exported.
Define the structure of the exported file for reinforcements. The options are:
239
Option
Plant with lying robot only
Description Exports all embeds without modifications.

SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER EXTIRON END SLABDATE
240
Option
Fabrication of welded rebars
Description The structure of the output file (one SLABDATE is shown only):
SLABDATE CONTOUR CUTOUT MOUNPART RODSTOCK BRGIRDER REFORCEM STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT STEELMAT RODSTOCK BRGIRDER END STEELMAT EXTIRON END REFORCEM END SLABDATE
241
Option
Form mesh automatically
Description The structure of the output file is the same as for Fabrication of welded rebars. This option allows you to collect mesh, single reinforcing bars and reinforcing bar groups into groups exported in one STEELMAT block. Collecting is made by Mesh defined by and Name UDA fields. Collecting of meshes which belong to different concrete cast units is supported.
1 (orange color) the mesh belongs to the bottom panel of the cast unit, mesh name is MESH1. 2 (blue color) two single bars, name is MESH1. 3 (green color) one reinforcing bar group belongs to the top panel, name is MESH1. If Export Type is set to Form mesh automatically and Mesh defined by is set to Name, all three different reinforcement types are collected into one mesh, which is exported in one STEELMAT block.
Mesh defined by
Parameter for automatic mesh collecting. Meshes with one bar are exported as a single reinforcing bar.
Class
Reinforcement with the same class number are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with one class number equals one mesh in the exported file.
Name
Reinforcement with the same name are collected into meshes. Reinforcement with the same name equals one mesh in the exported file.
UDA
Reinforcement with the same user-defined attribute (defined with Name of UDA property) are collected into meshes.
242
Name of UDA
Specify the name of the user-defined attribute for the Mesh defined by property.
Data specification
This describes the fields on the Data specification tab of the Export unitechnik (79) component.
Name of order
Fills order fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:

Name of component
Project number Project name Cast unit number
Fills component fields in the HEADER block with the selected data. The options are:
Cast unit position Cast unit number Assembly control number (ACN)
Project line3 text Project line4 text Slab number
Fills project information fields (3rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data. Fills project information fields (4rd line) in the HEADER block with the selected data. Define filling of slab number field in the SLABDATE blocks. Options are:

Info 1 text (60) Info 4 text (60)
Counter Cast unit position Cast unit number Assembly control number (ACN)
Fills information fields (1-4) in the SLABDATE and MOUNTPART blocks with the selected data.
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export

Description
Elematic ELiPLAN is a software for resource planning, scheduling, and management for precast concrete fabricators. Using the export and import features in Tekla Structures you can automate the data transfer between these two applications. The data transfer consists of the following actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Exporting ELiPLAN data file from Tekla Structures Importing ELiPLAN data file into ELiPLAN Exporting ELiPLAN status data file from Eliplan Importing ELiPLAN status data file into Tekla Structures
The ELiPLAN import (2) supports incremental approach, which means that ELiPLAN is able to create, update, and delete parts in it's database. This means that precast detailers can export the most up-to-date data files whenever the Tekla Structures model has been changed. Similar incremental support is included in the Tekla import (4). To keep the status and schedule data in Tekla Structures model up-to-date, we recommend you to update the status data regularly.
See also
Exporting ELiPLAN (p. 243) Import ELiPLAN status data
Exporting ELiPLAN
243
Exporting to ELiPLAN
To export part data to ELiPLAN, 1. 2. 3. 4. Press Ctrl + F to open the component catalog. Type Eliplan and click Search. Double-click Export data to EliPlan file to open the Export EliPlan file (68) dialog box. Set Scope of export to All and click Create to export the file. For more information on the other properties, see the table below.
Field
Scope of export
Description Use to export all parts or only selected parts. Because of the incremental import of ELiPLAN you need to select the same parts (and some additional parts, if needed) again when exporting the next time. Otherwise ELiPLAN will think that the parts missing from the subsequent file have been deleted in the Tekla Structures model. We recommend you to always use the All option. Use the Selected option only in special cases or when you are exporting parts for the first time.
Output file name
The name of the export file created in the model folder. The default name is eliplan.eli. You can import this file into ELiPLAN. With this file you can convert the parametric profile names into the ELiPLAN product codes, and the material descriptions into the ELiPLAN accessory codes. The default file name is eliplan_export.dat and this file can be located in your model, XS_FIRM or XS_PROJECT folder. A list of classes to exclude from the export. Typically this contains the class numbers used for cast-in-place concrete parts. Use to include or exclude the plotter data in the exported file. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the plotter data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of plotter data in subsequent exports.
Data conversion file
List of classes to be ignored (CIP) Export plotter data
Export material data
Use to include or exclude the detailed material data (receipt) of parts. If you have no use for material data in ELiPLAN (you have no material handling module in ELiPLAN), select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the material data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of material data in subsequent exports. If you do this, the receipt is also cleared in the ELiPLAN database and all modifications are lost.
244
Field
Export rebar bending data
Description Use to include or exclude the detailed rebar bending information. If you do not need this data in ELiPLAN, select No to exclude the data from the file and to reduce the file size. Note that once you have transferred the file with the rebar bending data (Yes) you should never switch off (No) the export of rebar bending data in subsequent exports.
Create
Click this button to export the data.
Before you can transfer data to EliPlan you need to define how the product codes, types, and accessory codes (material description) are moved from the Tekla Structures model to ELiPLAN. For more information, see Configuration for ELiPLAN export.
See also
Overview of ELiPLAN import and export (p. 199) Import ELiPLAN status data
7.5 Exporting drawings

To export Tekla Structures drawings as a DXF or DWG file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Click Drawings & Reports > Drawing List.... Select the drawings from the list. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu. The Export drawings dialog box is displayed. On the Export file tab, browse for the file you want to export by clicking the Browse... button. Select a file type: DXF or DWG. Select the Include revision mark to file name check box if you want to include a revision mark in the file name. Set the layer options as required on the Layer options tab. For more information, see Layers (p. 245). Set the other options as required on the Options tab: If you want to export the drawing so that the DWG/DXF content is grouped by object, select the Export objects as groups check box. When you do this, Tekla Structures forms a new group for each object (part, mark, dimension line etc.). Set the Drawing scale and Line type scale.

9.
Select the Cut lines with text check box if you do not want to display continuous lines in exported drawings, for example, to run the line through text or drawing marks. Select the Export custom lines as split lines check box to ensure that custom lines have the same appearance in the software you are exporting to and when printed.
Click Export.
Layers
Use the Layer options tab on the Export Drawings dialog box to define the layering options. If you want to specify which layers different drawing objects belong to, click Setup.... The
Drawing Export Layers dialog box is displayed.
245
Rules define the drawing objects Available layers Click to modify layer names and color Organize the rules by right-clicking and using Move up and Move down. You cannot move the rule Other object type. This collects all the exported objects that do not match any other rules.
Changing layers
To change a layer: 1. 2. 3. Right-click a layer item, and select Select layer.... The Select layer dialog box is displayed. Select the desired layer. Click OK.
Defining marks to their own layers
You can define marks to their own layers. This applies to all kinds of marks: bolt marks, part marks, connection marks, neighbour part marks, reinforcement marks and component marks. To do this: 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the mark layer rule of the mark you want to define to its own layer in Layer rules. Right-click and select Add next level rule from the pop-up menu. Enter a rule name (for example, BeamMark) and select a filter (for example, beams) and click OK. Tekla Structures creates the new rule BeamMark, which you can use when exporting drawings.
Advanced line type and layer conversion
You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers. For more information, see Advanced line type and layer conversion (p. 247).
246
Copying settings
To copy layer settings to another project: 1. 2. 3. Enter a name in the uppermost field. Click Save as. Copy the file *.ldb from the current model folder to the firm or project folder. See also Folder search order (p. 70).
The font name used in Tekla Structures is used to form the name of the text style in AutoCAD. Use dxf_fonts.cnv conversion file to define which font file will be connected to the created AutoCAD style. See also Conversion files (p. 175).
Advanced line type and layer conversion

You can use advanced conversion to convert the type, color and weight of lines and layers.
Usage
1. 2.
Select the Advanced line type and layer conversion check box on the Layer options tab in the Export Drawings dialog box. Define the file to be used in the conversion in Conversion file. Tekla Structures uses the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp by default for the conversion. If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml as a template. For more information, see Defining your own line type mappings (p. 247).
Defining your own line type mappings

If you need to define your own line type mappings, you can use the file LineTypeMapping.xml in the folder ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp as a template. To define your own line type mappings: 1. Open the mapping file using a text editor. We recommend that you use an editor that is capable to validate XML in order to maintain the structure of the document valid.
2.
Add your own definitions. Some mappings have been predefined in the mapping file. Use these mappings as a template for your own mappings. You have two options for defining the mappings:
Mapping according to line types only, for example all lines in all layers with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED. Mapping according to line types and layer, for example all lines on the layer BEAM with line type XKITLINE01 will be exported to DASHED. Tekla Structures first searches for this kinds of mappings by default. This is how the file LineTypeMapping.xml is composed:
247
The first section consists of XML and document type definition. Do not change or remove this section. The mappings that are available are defined here. You can use these mappings as a template for your own mappings.
248
In the following example, a new Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE00 lines in the Beam layer are converted to BORDER type, color is converted to 10 and weight to 1.00 mm:
For the list of available line types, see the TeklaStructures.lin file, which is located in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\common\inp folder. You can open and edit the file using any text editor. The table below describes which line type name corresponds to which line type appearance.
Line type name

XKITLINE00 XKITLINE01 XKITLINE02 XKITLINE03 XKITLINE04 XKITLINE05 XKITLINE06
Line type appearance

3.
Exporting hidden lines
Define the color of the line in the Color attribute. Enter the color values in AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) codes (numbers from 0 to 255). Define the thickness of the line in the Weight attribute. Enter the values in hundredths of millimeters. Define the layers that the mapping will apply to in the LayerName attribute. If you leave out the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for any layer. If you include the attribute LayerName, Tekla Structures uses the line type mapping for that layer only.
Save the mapping file to the model folder of the model whose drawing you want to export.
You can use the LineTypeMapping.xml file also for exporting hidden lines to separate layers in DWG/DXF export. Define the hidden lines to their own layers. In the following example, a Mapping element is added to the file, where XKITLINE02 lines in the Part layer are converted to HIDDEN2 type, and the layer name is converted to Part_Hidden.
249
For the export to succeed, make sure that the Part_Hidden layer exists on the list of available layers in the Modify Layers dialog box.
7.6 Tekla WebViewer

You can publish your Tekla Structures models as web pages that can be viewed via the Internet using a web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer).
Topics
Publishing a model as a web page (p. 250) Web templates (p. 252) Emailing WebViewer models (p. 252) Handling named views (p. 253) Handling clip planes (p. 253) Hiding and showing objects (p. 255) Full content rendering (p. 255)
Publishing a model as a web page

To publish a Tekla Structures model as a web page: 1. 2. 3. Click File > Publish as Web page... to open the Publish as Web Page dialog box. In the File name field, enter the destination path and file name for the published model. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser checkbox, the model opens in your web browser.
If you select Selected objects in the dialog box, use the selection switches to control whether parts or parts of assemblies/cast units are published. By default, Tekla Structures creates a PublicWeb folder with sub-folders in the current model folder, and places the published model there as an index.html file.
You can choose the location and name for the published model folder. You can also rename the published file but do not change the file name extension (*.xml).
When you open the model in a web browser, it includes several commands for examining the model. You can also right-click the model in the browser to access a pop-up menu containing these commands.
Customizing Web Viewer tooltips

You can define what kind of tooltips are shown in a published Web Viewer model. Use Template Editor to define your own tooltip templates. To publish a model as a web page showing customized tooltips: 1. Define a customized tooltip report template. a Use Template Editor to create a new tooltip template.
250
b c
Save the template in *.rpt format in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\environments\<environment>\templa te\tooltips folder. Add the template in the WebViewerTooltips.ini file, which is located in the same folder as the tooltip templates. For example:
albl_PartInformation=PartInformation.rpt
2. 3. 4.
Click File > Publish as Web Page.... Under Tooltip in Web Viewer, select the customized template from the list. The Preview field displays the selected tooltip. Click Publish. If you select the Open in browser check box, the model opens in your web browser.
See also
Publishing a model as a web page (p. 250)
251
Web templates
The sub-folders under ..\ Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\WebTemplates\TeklaWebViewer contain all Tekla Web Viewer specific materials, for example, a tool (*.dll) for viewing the model, and templates for HTML files. When you publish a model as a web page, Tekla Structures copies the tool and files to the folder you have specified in the File name field. You cannot modify the tool, but you can modify the HTML files to include information relevant to your firm and project. You can use project-specific template fields in the HTML files. Just insert them, surrounded by % characters, in an HTML file in the Tekla Web Viewer folder. Tekla Structures replaces them with the current information from the model you are publishing.
Example
When you want the project name to show in the Web Viewer model, insert the string %NAME% in an HTML file. When you publish models as a web page, Tekla Structures takes the project name information from the Project properties dialog box.
Do not remove the string %PUBLISHED_MODEL% from the index.html file. Tekla Structures replaces it with the file name information from the dialog box.
Emailing WebViewer models

To email a published model: 1. 2.
See also
Zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure. Attach the .zip file to an e-mail message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can then unzip the files and save the contents.
Receiving WebViewer models (p. 252)
Receiving WebViewer models

When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.
See also
Sending WebViewer links (p. 252) Handling named views (p. 253) Handling clip planes (p. 253) Hiding and showing objects (p. 255) Full content rendering (p. 255) How to move and zoom? (p. 255)
Sending WebViewer links

There are two ways to send links from Tekla WebViewer:

Send WebViewer link
Send WebViewer link Send URL link
Use this tool to send a link to a single Tekla Structures view. To see the view name in the Named views list, the receiver copies the text string and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
252
To send several views, copy the text strings pointing to the views into a text file and send the text file. The receiver then copies the contents of the text file and pastes it into the WebViewer model.
See also Receiving WebViewer models (p. 252).

Send URL link
Use this tool to send a URL link to the model. Recipients must have access to the folder containing your published model.
Handling named views

To create named views from a published model, 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the index.html for the published model. Zoom in on the part of the model from which you want to create the view. Right-click and select Copy location. Create a new file in any text editor (for example, Notepad) and paste the location information into it. It should look like this:
5. 6. 7.
The default name for the view is xyz. To change it, in your text editor, replace the text xyz with the view name that you want to use. Now you need to copy the updated location information to the published model. Select all the text in the text editor, right-click and select Copy. In WebViewer, right-click on the model and select Paste location. The view name appears on the Named views list.
WebViewer does not save named views with the published model. But, you can save the text file that contains the location information, then cut and paste the text to the published model in WebViewer the next time you want to use the view. To allow others to see your named views, send them using the Send WebViewer link tool. See Sending WebViewer links (p. 252).
Handling clip planes

Use the keyboard shortcut P or the pop-up menu to create clip planes:
253
To create a clip plane, click shortcut P, and select a plane in the model: To select the clip plane, click the scissor symbol:
Moving clip planes
Move the clip plane by dragging the scissor symbol. You can change the location of the symbol by holding down the Shift key and moving the symbol. Select one clip plane and press space bar to jump between clip planes.
254
Hiding and showing objects

Use the mouse wheel to hide and show objects:
To hide objects, move the cursor over the objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll up (or press the Page Up key). To unhide object, move the cursor over the hidden objects, hold down the Ctrl key and scroll down (or press the Page Down key). Press the Esc key to show all objects.
Full content rendering

To handle large models faster, make full content rendering unavailable:
Right-click and select Disable full content rendering from the pop-up menu. To enable full content rendering, select Enable full content rendering from the pop-up menu.
How to move and zoom?

Use the following commands to move and zoom in a model:
Command (Shortcut)
Zoom
Action/Description Click Page Up or Page Down keys, or scroll mouse wheel forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out. Click Pan and drag, or drag with the mouse middle button. Totate with mouse (Ctrl + R), rotate model one round (Shift + R) or rotate the model continuously (Shift + T). Click Fly and move the mouse forward to fly forward. To change flying direction, move the mouse to the desired direction. To stop, click Esc. Centers the model on the screen. Returns the model to the original view. Use to relocate the center of rotation. 1. 2. 3. Press the V key. Click to select the new center of rotation. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag with the middle mouse button.
Pan (P) Rotate (Ctrl + R, Shift
? R, Shift + T)
Fly (Shift+F)
Center (Ins) Home (Home)
Set view point (V)
255
You can also right-click the model and select the move and zoom commands from the popup menu.
256
Reserved shortcuts
Introduction
This appendix lists the shortcut keys Tekla Structures installs by default. You should not assign these shortcuts to other commands. You can use upper or lower case for shortcuts containing characters (e.g. a or A). You need to use a combination of keystrokes in some shortcuts. The keystrokes are linked with the + character.
Example Topics
To use the shortcut for Redo, Ctrl+Z, hold down the Ctrl key and press Z on the keyboard. Common shortcuts (p. 257) Modeling commands (p. 258) Drawing commands (p. 259) UCS (p. 260) Representation for parts (p. 260) Representation for component parts (p. 261)
8.1 Common shortcuts

Command Help Open Save Delete Properties Undo Redo Interrupt Repeat last command Shortcut F1 Ctrl + O Ctrl + S Del Alt+Enter Ctrl+Z Ctrl+Y Esc Enter
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Reserved shortcuts
257
8.2 Modeling commands

Command Pan Move right Move left Move down Move up Rotate using mouse Rotate using keyboard Disable view rotation Set view rotation point Auto rotate 3D/Plane Open component catalog Fly (in perspective views) Zoom original Zoom previous Zoom in Zoom out Center by cursor Update window Snapshots Smart Select Drag and drop Middle button pan Copy Move Ortho Relative snap Relative coordinate input Absolute coordinate input Next position Previous position Selection filter Add to selection Toggle selection Lock X, Y or Z coordinates Select all selection switch Shortcut P x z y w Ctrl+R Ctrl + arrow keys,Shift + arrow keys F8 V Shift + R, Shift + T Ctrl+P Ctrl+F Shift+F Home End PgUp PgDn Ins Ctrl+U F9, F10, F11, F12 S D Shift+M Ctrl + C Ctrl + M O R @, R $, A Tab Shift + Tab Ctrl + G Shift Ctrl X, Y or Z F2
258
Command Select parts selection switch Select all Select assembly Snap to reference lines/ points Snap to geometry lines/ points Snap to nearest points Snap to any position Advanced options Inquire object Free measure Create new model Open the Views list Create clip plane Rollover highlight Hide object Undo last polygon pick Finish polygon input Create AutoConnection Phase manager Clash check AutoDrawing Drawing list Clone drawing Print drawings Create report
Shortcut F3 Ctrl + A Alt + object F4 F5 F6 F7 Ctrl + E Shift + I F Ctrl + N Ctrl + I Shift + X H Shift + H Backspace Space bar Ctrl + J Ctrl + H Shift + C Ctrl + W Ctrl + L Ctrl + D Shift + P Ctrl + B
8.3 Drawing commands

Command Associative symbol Black and white drawing Ghost outline Open drawing list Open next drawing Open previous drawing Shortcut Shift + A B Shift + G Ctrl + O Ctrl + Pg Dn Ctrl + Pg Up
259
Command Add an orthogonal dimension In Master Drawing Catalog: Select all In Master Drawing Catalog: Create drawings for all parts In Master Drawing Catalog: Create drawings In Drawing list: Add to Master Drawing Catalog
Shortcut G Ctrl + A Alt + A
Alt + C Ctrl + M
8.4 UCS
Command Set UCS origin Set UCS by two points Toggle orientation Reset current Reset all Shortcut U Shift+U Ctrl+T Ctrl+1 Ctrl+0
8.5 Representation for parts

Command Wireframe Shaded Wireframe Hidden Lines Rendered Show Only Selected Shortcut Ctrl+1 Ctrl+2 Ctrl+3 Ctrl+4 Ctrl+5
260
8.6 Representation for component parts

Command Wireframe Shaded Wireframe Hidden Lines Rendered Show Only Selected
See also
Shortcut Shift+1 Shift+2 Shift+3 Shift+4 Shift+5
Defining shortcuts (p. 28)
261
Index
#
.NET ............................................................................. 30 Autosave.......................................................................22 error.......................................................................25 file location ............................................................24 keeping files ..........................................................24 setting interval .......................................................23 usernames.............................................................24
a
access keys................................................................ 257 access rights ................................................................ 51 adding customized icons for macros................................. 27 adding properties.......................................................... 75 adding user-defined attributes...................................... 75 advanced line type and layer conversion ................... 247 defining your own line type mappings ................. 247 line type mapping ................................................ 247 advanced options disabling ................................................................ 58 setting.................................................................... 56 ail files .......................................................................... 65 analysis models (CIS) ........................................185, 205 anti-spyware ................................................................. 19 ASCII exporting ............................................................. 212 importing .....................................................191, 194 assdb.db....................................................................... 66 AutoConnection.......................................................... 133 changing a connection ........................................ 137 restrictions........................................................... 134 rules .................................................................... 141 setup ................................................................... 134 when to use........................................................... 21 AutoDefaults............................................................... 133 rules .................................................................... 141 setup ................................................................... 137 when to use........................................................... 21 AutoDrawings wizard files creating ................................................................. 83 AutoDrawings wizard log.............................................. 89 automating detailing ..................................................... 19
b
bak files ........................................................................71 beam length................................................................159 bin files .........................................................................66 bolt assemblies...........................................................117 bolt assembly catalog .................................................117 viewing or modifying............................................119 bolt catalog .................................................................117 exporting..............................................................123 importing..............................................................123 importing part of ..................................................126 merging ...............................................................122 modifying .............................................................117 saving ..................................................................119 upgrading to new version ....................................123 viewing ................................................................117 bolt length calculation .................................................128 bolts catalog.................................................................117 importing catalog .................................................123 importing part of catalog......................................126 length...................................................................128 upgrading catalog to new version........................123 Bus importing..............................................................191 BVBS export ...............................................................218 by_number.ail ...............................................................79
c
CAD exporting models .................................................208 import file types ...................................................186 importing..............................................................186
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
262
Calma .................................................................186, 208 catalog export files ..................................................... 125 editing.................................................................. 126 catalogs ........................................................................ 16 a closer look at the export file ............................. 125 bolt and assembly introduction............................ 117 common features and processes .......................... 93 difference between Update and OK ...................... 95 editing export files ............................................... 126 for advanced users.............................................. 124 material introduction............................................ 113 overview ................................................................ 93 profile introduction................................................. 95 reinforcing bar introduction.................................. 124 rules in profile catalog ........................................... 96 saving a modified catalog...................................... 94 units used in import and export ........................... 127 which catalog am I using?..................................... 94 changing the NC folder............................................... 158 changing user-defined attributes .................................. 75 checking multi-user databases..................................... 50 CIMsteel exporting analysis models................................... 205 exporting manufacturing models ......................... 206 CIS exporting analysis models................................... 205 exporting manufacturing models ......................... 206 importing analysis models................................... 185 CNC............................................................................ 149 inner corner shape .............................................. 154 CNC flange clearance ................................................ 154 cnv files ................................................................65, 175 Combining properties ................................................. 144 component description files.......................................... 61 Connection Browser ................................................... 137 connection properties files.......................................... 138 accessing ............................................................ 139 saving.................................................................. 139 conversion files CIS examples...................................................... 207 creating ............................................................... 177 in import and export ............................................ 175 locating................................................................ 177 samples............................................................... 177 troubleshooting.................................................... 178 where to save...................................................... 177 converting IFC objects .......................................................... 183 copying multi-user models.................................................. 40
creating conversion files....................................................177 cross sections......................................................104 customer-specific initializarion file .........................59 NC files................................................................159 project-specific initialization file .............................59 shortcuts................................................................59 standard files .........................................................82 cross sections creating................................................................104 deleting from catalog ...........................................106 modifying .............................................................105 customizing...................................................................74 AutoDrawings wizard files .....................................83 connections ...........................................................20 creating standard files ...........................................82 interface.................................................................25 message files ........................................................79 modeling tools .......................................................20 other properties files..............................................82 parametric profiles.................................................80 properties ..............................................................75 Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API...................30 toolbars..................................................................25 user-defined fields in templates.............................77 Web Viewer tooltips.............................................250
d
dat files .........................................................................62 data files and modeling tools ........................................62 db1................................................................................71 db2................................................................................71 decimals .......................................................................17 defaults.zxt ........................................................ 137, 139 deleting cross sections from catalog.................................106 material grades from catalog...............................115 unnecessary drawing files .....................................51 detailing automating.............................................................19 dg files ..........................................................................71 DGN exporting 3D ........................................................203 disabling advanced options ..........................................58 display adaptor optimizing performance .........................................29 distance from flange within which web is not cut........154 dproc files .....................................................................67 drawing files..................................................................49 deleting unnecessary ............................................51
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
263
drawings exporting..............................................................245 in multi-user mode .................................................49 DSTV ..........................................................................188 converting to DXF................................................161 exporting..............................................................204 importing..............................................................188 DSTV (NC)..................................................................159 DSTV connection properties.........................................64 DSTV.bat ....................................................................161 dstv.lis...........................................................................64 DWG/DXF files importing..............................................................182 DXF exporting 3D ........................................................202 DXF (NC) ....................................................................160
e
ECP ............................................................................211 edge distance ...............................................................17 editing catalog export files...............................................126 connection properties ..........................................140 drawings in multi-user mode..................................49 EJE .............................................................................211 ELiPLAN overview of import and export .................... 199, 243 env_global_default.ini ...................................................58 environment variables see advanced options............................................56 environments location of environment files ..................................90 error messages in multi-user mode .................................................41 Eureka LPM importing..............................................................199 executable files .............................................................66 export basics ..................................................................167 overview ..............................................................167 export files from catalog.........................................................125 Export rebar BVBS (78) ..................................... 218, 220 Export Unitechnik (79) Data specification ................................................243 Main.....................................................................225 Reinforcement .....................................................239 TS configuration ..................................................234 Unitechnik configuration ......................................230
exporting 3D DGN ...............................................................203 3D DXF ................................................................202 ASCII files ............................................................212 bolt catalog ..........................................................123 BVBS ...................................................................216 CAD models.........................................................208 CIMsteel analysis models ....................................205 CIMsteel manufacturing models ..........................206 different formats.......................................... 172, 201 drawings ..............................................................245 DSTV ...................................................................204 DWG ....................................................................245 DXF......................................................................245 ELiPLAN ..............................................................243 FEM models.........................................................204 IFC export types ..................................................214 IFC files................................................................212 materials ..............................................................116 MIS ......................................................................211 model dump .........................................................215 part of profile catalog ...........................................111 profile catalog ......................................................111 SDNF ...................................................................209 STAAD.................................................................204 to other software ..................................................201 to other sofware ...................................................172 Unitechnik ............................................................221 extended application .....................................................30
f
FabTrol/KISS ..............................................................211 FEM exporting ..............................................................204 import file types....................................................188 importing ..............................................................187 yield stress in import ............................................191 file extensions ...............................................................67 file types and function ...................................................60 filter in catalogs..............................................................94 firm folder ............................................................... 16, 73 fittings affect NC..........................................................159 flat bars .........................................................................85 fltprops.inp ....................................................................85
264
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
folders........................................................................... 70 firm ........................................................................ 73 model .................................................................... 71 project ................................................................... 73 search order .......................................................... 70 system................................................................... 73 template ................................................................ 73 fonts.............................................................................. 66 framing conditions ...................................................... 134
g
grade .......................................................................... 115
h
hard stamps................................................................ 164 hidden folders............................................................... 91 hidden lines ................................................................ 247 HLI......................................................................186, 208
i
IFC checking profile and material of converted objects ... 184 converting objects ............................................... 183 creating reports of converted objects .................. 184 defining the resulting IFC entity for the exported model objects...................................................... 213 export types......................................................... 214 exporting ............................................ 212, 213, 214 exporting a Tekla Structures model into an IFC file .. 214 Exporting user-defined and template attributes as property sets ................................................ 215 importing ............................................................. 182 viewing catalog and mapping files of converted objects.............................................................. 184 import basics .................................................................. 167 overview .............................................................. 167 import tools................................................................. 179
importing an IFC model.......................................................183 ASCII .......................................................... 191, 194 bolt catalog ..........................................................123 Bus ......................................................................191 CAD models ........................................................186 changed objects ..................................................181 CIS analysis models............................................185 different formats ......................................... 168, 178 DSTV...................................................................188 DWG/DXF files ....................................................182 ELiPLAN..............................................................200 Eureka LPM.........................................................199 FEM models ........................................................187 from other software .................................... 168, 178 IFC.......................................................................182 materials..............................................................116 MicasPlus ............................................................199 model dump.........................................................191 models, overview.................................................179 part of bolt catalog...............................................126 profile catalog ......................................................112 profiles from previous versions............................112 re-importing models.............................................180 SDNF...................................................................186 S-Frame ..............................................................199 STAAD ................................................................189 Stan 3d ................................................................190 Steelfab ...............................................................198 initialization file .............................................................55 customer-specific initializarion file .........................59 including other initialization files ............................59 project-specific initialization file .............................59 structure ................................................................58 using......................................................................56 inner corner shape......................................................154 inp files .........................................................................61 interface customizing ...........................................................25 Iteration.......................................................................145
k
key combinations........................................................257 key sequences............................................................257 keyboard shortcuts .....................................................257 keystrokes ..................................................................257
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
265
l
lay files..........................................................................67 layers in drawings ..........................................................245 legend_text.fields..........................................................77 line type mapping........................................................247 lis files ...........................................................................65 lock attribute .................................................................51 log files..........................................................................87 access part pop-up menu ......................................90 AutoDrawings wizard.............................................89 direct access to parts from log...............................90 drawing history ......................................................89 list of ......................................................................87 numbering history ........................................... 88, 89 of CAD import ......................................................186 of SDNF import....................................................186 viewing...................................................................90
m
machine tool ...............................................................149 macro............................................................................17 maintenance procedures in multi-user mode .................................................50 manufacturing .............................................................149 manufacturing models (CIS) .......................................206 map to Windows fonts ..................................................66 master models ..............................................................36 saving ....................................................................43 matdb.bin ......................................................................66 material catalog ..........................................................113 viewing or modifying ............................................113 material grades adding to material catalog ...................................115 deleting ................................................................115 material types adding to material catalog ...................................115 materials adding material grades ........................................115 adding material types ..........................................115 adding user-defined attributes .............................114 catalog .................................................................113 deleting material grades ......................................115 exporting and importing .......................................116 of profiles ...............................................................97 user-defined symbols ..........................................116 matexp_cis.cnv ...........................................................207
menus creating user-defined menu ...................................27 merging bolt catalog ..........................................................122 profile catalog ......................................................110 messages......................................................................65 MicasPlus importing ..............................................................199 MicroSAS ....................................................................204 Migration Wizard ...........................................................57 MIS export file types....................................................211 exporting ..............................................................211 list file extensions.................................................212 model dump exporting ..............................................................215 importing ..............................................................191 modeling in multi-user mode .................................................43 modeling tools when to customize .................................................20 modifying bolt assemblies ....................................................119 bolt catalog ..........................................................117 cross sections ......................................................105 material catalog ...................................................113 profile catalog ............................................... 95, 102 Monorail ......................................................................188 multi user ......................................................................33 multiuser .......................................................................33 multi-user mode ............................................................33 active multi-users...................................................40 autosave ................................................................38 changing the server of a multi-user model.............34 checking databases ...............................................50 clearing locks .........................................................41 error messages......................................................41 locking models .......................................................36 locks for drawings ..................................................50 maintenance procedures .......................................50 numbering....................................................... 47, 48 overview.................................................................33 recommendations ..................................................42 saving in.......................................................... 38, 43 saving model revision comments...........................38 switching between single-user and multi-user modes ....................................................................34 system setup..........................................................37 when to use ...........................................................34 multi-user models copying ..................................................................40 shutting down.........................................................40 multi-user system..........................................................35
266
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
n
NC .............................................................................. 149 DSTV................................................................... 149 formats ................................................................ 149 NC file classifier.......................................................... 150 NC files....................................................................... 149 creating ............................................................... 159 nc1 files ........................................................................ 71 numbering controlling access to numbering setup.................. 53 in multi-user mode...........................................47, 48 numbering history......................................................... 88
o
objects.inp .................................................................... 78 fields...................................................................... 78 optimizing performance display adaptor...................................................... 29 solid buffer size ..................................................... 29 solids ..................................................................... 30 virtual memory....................................................... 29 options.......................................................................... 16 overlapping series ........................................................ 89
p
parametric profiles........................................................ 95 part properties predefining ............................................................ 20 PDMS ......................................................................... 211 performance ................................................................. 29 solid buffer size ..................................................... 29 permissions .................................................................. 51 Plantview .................................................................... 186 plotdev.bin .................................................................... 67 PML ............................................................................ 209 pop_mark_parts.inp.................................................... 162 pop-mark settings....................................................... 162 pop-marks .................................................................. 161 Pos1...4 ........................................................................ 17 position number in SDNF import.................................................... 186 prfexp_cis.cnv ............................................................ 207 printer files.................................................................... 67 privileges ...................................................................... 51 privileges.inp ................................................................ 52 profdb.bin ..................................................................... 66
profile catalog ...............................................................95 adding user attributes to profile catalog rules......100 exporting..............................................................111 exporting part of ..................................................111 importing..............................................................112 merging ...............................................................110 viewing or modifying............................................102 profile catalog rules adding user attributes..........................................100 Profile Editor ...................................................... 106, 107 profile folder files ..........................................................65 profiles adding to catalog ........................................ 103, 108 adding user-defined attributes to.........................110 catalog...................................................................95 cross section ...................................... 104, 105, 106 defining material ....................................................97 exporting catalog .................................................111 exporting part of catalog......................................111 importing catalog .................................................112 importing from previous versions.........................112 merging catalogs .................................................110 parametric .............................................................95 standard ................................................................95 types of chamfer..................................................105 user-defined ..........................................................95 viewing or modifying..............................................95 with variable cross sections................ 106, 107, 108 profitab.inp............................................................. 65, 81 project folder.......................................................... 16, 73 project setup catalogs .................................................................16 drawing properties.................................................21 firm and project folders..........................................16 layouts and templates ...........................................22 options...................................................................16 print devices ..........................................................22 reports and symbols ..............................................22 wizards ..................................................................22 properties adding....................................................................75
r
reaction forces ............................................................147 recording macros..........................................................17 reports of import ..............................................................182 revision saving model revision comments ..........................38
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
267
revision control in import...............................................................181 rpt files ..........................................................................67 rule groups..................................................................134 creating................................................................135 rule sets ......................................................................134 creating................................................................135 editing ..................................................................135 priority..................................................................140 rules ............................................................................141 adding to catalog ...................................................99 deleting ................................................................100 editing catalog rules.............................................100 working with catalogs ............................................96 rules.zxt ......................................................................137 running macros .............................................................17
STAAD exporting ..............................................................204 importing ..............................................................189 Staad...........................................................................188 Stan 3d........................................................................188 importing ..............................................................190 standard files.................................................................81 standard profiles ...........................................................95 Steel 2000...................................................................211 Steelfab importing ..............................................................198 studs ...........................................................................121 sym files ........................................................................66 system folder.................................................................73
s
SACS ..........................................................................188 save defaults.................................................................81 saved attributes ............................................................71 saving bolt catalog ..........................................................119 in multi-user mode .......................................... 38, 43 master models .......................................................43 modified catalogs...................................................94 SCIA .................................................................. 198, 208 screwdb.db ...................................................................66 SDNF exporting..............................................................209 importing..............................................................186 log files of import .................................................186 position number in import ....................................186 SDNF (PDMS) ................................................... 186, 209 select filter see selection filter..................................................22 uses .......................................................................22 S-Frame......................................................................188 importing..............................................................199 shear force calculation................................................147 shortcut keys...............................................................257 shortcuts creating..................................................................59 defining keys reserved .........................................................28 reserved...............................................................257 shutting down multi-user models ..................................40 single-user vs multi-user...............................................34 solid buffer size optimizing performance .........................................29
t
Tekla Open API.............................................................30 Tekla Structures server.................................................35 TeklaStructures.ini ........................................................58 toolbars adding customized icons for macros .....................27 creating user-defined toolbar .................................27 customizing............................................................25 tooltips Web Viewer .........................................................250 tpl files...........................................................................67 tube components ........................................................157 tube NC files ...............................................................157 twin profile conversion in import.............................................176
u
UDL.............................................................................147 unfold_corner_ratios.inp ...............................................84 unfolding parameters ....................................................84 Unitechnik export ........................................................222 Unitechnik export reference ........................................225 units in catalog import and export ................................127 units and decimals ........................................................17 updating .................................................................17 User Field 1...................................................................75 user.ini ................................................................... 56, 58 editing ....................................................................57 user-defined attributes adding ....................................................................75 adding to material grade ......................................114 user-defined profiles .....................................................95
268
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
user-defined symbols for materials ........................................................ 116 usernames.................................................................... 24 using Tekla Structures effectively................................. 15
wizard files....................................................................67 interpreting ............................................................83 working models.............................................................36
v
variables see advanced options ........................................... 56 viewing bolt assemblies ................................................... 119 bolt catalog.......................................................... 117 log files .................................................................. 90 material catalog................................................... 113 profile catalog................................................95, 102 virtual memory optimizing performance......................................... 29
x
XML ................................................................... 186, 210 xsdb.xs .........................................................................71 xslib.db1 .......................................................................71 xslib.db2 .......................................................................71 xsr files .........................................................................71
y
yield stress in FEM import ......................................................191
w
warning messages ....................................................... 19
z
zxt files............................................................... 137, 139
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
269

System 160 Enu

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

System 160 Enu

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Tekla Structures

Product version 16.0 December 2009

Conventions used in this guide

The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:

Italic bold Monospace

The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doing things.

Using Tekla Structures effectively......................................................... 15

Drawings and printers........................................................................................................................... 21

Customizing the interface ..................................................................................................................... 25

Optimizing system performance ........................................................................................................... 29

Customizing Tekla Structures with Tekla Open API ............................................................................. 30

Files and Folders..................................................................................... 55

File types and function .......................................................................................................................... 60

Customizing Tekla Structures............................................................................................................... 74

Log files ................................................................................................................................................ 87

Location of environment files ................................................................................................................ 90 Location of hidden files ......................................................................................................................... 91

The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs .................................................................................................. 117

AutoDefaults setup ............................................................................................................................. 137

Import and export.................................................................................. 167

Reserved shortcuts ............................................................................... 257

Using Tekla Structures effectively

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Firm and project folders

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Units and decimals

Updating units and decimals in dialog boxes (p. 17)

Updating units and decimals in dialog boxes

Units and decimals (p. 17)

Recording and running macros

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

The macro opens in the associated text editor.

Automating the detailing process

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Predefining part properties

Using predefined properties

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Predefined properties See also Getting Started.

1.3 Drawings and printers

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Layouts and templates

Reports and symbols

Defining print devices

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Setting Autosave interval

If the interval values are set to less than 2, autosave is disabled.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Autosave file location

Keeping Autosave files

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Fatal: Model memory corrupted by read.

1.5 Customizing the interface

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Action Add or remove commands

Delete commands or toolbars

Restore original toolbar Display toolbar

Move command in toolbar tree

Use arrow buttons.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 Using Tekla Structures effectively

Creating a user-defined toolbar

Adding customized icons for macros

Creating a user-defined menu